650i Gran Coupe (2014) - Car BMW - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free 650i Gran Coupe (2014) BMW in PDF.
User questions about 650i Gran Coupe (2014) BMW
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Car in PDF format for free! Find your manual 650i Gran Coupe (2014) - BMW and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. 650i Gran Coupe (2014) by BMW.
USER MANUAL 650i Gran Coupe (2014) BMW
text_image
Contents A-Z Owner's Manual for Vehicle BMW The Ultimate Driving Machine M JH 4767THE BMW 6 SERIES GRAN COUPE.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
BMW EfficientDynamics
Less emissions. More driving pleasure.
6 Series Gran Coupe
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional brochures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/13, 13 07 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a particular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 232.
6 Notes
At a glance
12 Cockpit
16 iDrive
22 Voice activation system
25 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
30 Opening and closing
45 Adjusting
54 Transporting children safely
58 Driving
72 Displays
87 Lamps
92 Safety
117 Driving stability control systems
125 Driving comfort
152 Climate control
160 Interior equipment
167 Storage compartments
Driving tips
174 Things to remember when driving
177 Loading
179 Saving fuel
Mobility
188 Refueling
190 Fuel
191 Wheels and tires
203 Engine compartment
205 Engine oil
207 Coolant
208 Maintenance
210Replacing components
216 Breakdown assistance
221 Care
Reference
228 Technical data
232 Everything from A to Z
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
User's manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Communication and the short commands of the voice activation system are described in a separate user's manual, which is also included with the onboard literature.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
A Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.
Marks the end of a specific item of information.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.
»...« Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.
»...« Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.
Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.
Symbols on vehicle components
i Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is also described and illustrated that is not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or the country-specific variants.
This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's Manual
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de-
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair methods.
Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with appropriately trained personnel.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.
Parts and Accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW. When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information. Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties:
▶ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▶ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▶ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▶ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▶ California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance measures:
▶ BMW Maintenance system
▶ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models
▶ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that temporarily or permanently store technical information about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment:
▶ Operating states of system components, fill levels for instance.
▶ Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components, e.g., wheel rotation speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration.
Malfunctions and faults in important system components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▶ Responses by the vehicle to special situations, e.g., deployment of an airbag, engagement of stability control systems.
▶ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to optimize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., repair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical information can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, including the manufacturer, using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain further information there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis.
When the vehicle is in use, situations are conceivable in which it might be possible to associate this technical data with individuals if it is combined with other information, e.g., an accident report, damage to the vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo-
cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
▶ How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
▶ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened.
▶ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▶ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip-
ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
All around the steering wheel

text_image
7 8 9 10 11 8 12 13 14 6 5 4 3 2 1 19 18 17 16 151 Roller sunblind 42
2 Safety switch for the windows and the roller sunblind in the rear 42
3 Power windows 41
4 Exterior mirror operation 51
5 Driver assistance systems

Active Blind Spot Detection 113

Intelligent Safety 100

Lane departure warning 111

Night Vision with pedestrian detection 108

Head-up Display 149
6 Lamps

Front fog lamps 90

Parking lamps 87

Low beams 87

Automatic headlamp control 88
Daytime running lights 88
Adaptive Light Control 88
High-beam Assistant 89

Instrument lighting 90
7 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 65

High beams, head-lamp flasher 65

High-beam Assistant 89

Roadside parking lamps 88

Computer 83
8 Shift paddles 70
9 Steering wheel buttons, left

Store speed 134, 125

Resume speed 136, 128

Cruise control on/off, interrupting 126

Cruise control on/off, interrupting 134

Reduce distance 128

Increase distance 128

Congestion Assistant ON/OFF, Pause 131

Congestion Assistant: setting cruise control distance 125
Cruise control rocker switch 136, 127
10 Instrument cluster 72
11 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation 22

Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
Thumbwheel for selection lists 83
12 Steering column stalk, right

Windshield wipers 65

Rain sensor 66

Clean the windshields and head-lamps 67
13 Start stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 59
14 Automatic Engine Start/Stop OFF Function 60
15 Horn
16 Steering wheel heating 53
17 Adjust the steering wheel 53
18 Unlocking the hood
19 Open the trunk lid 36
All around the center console

text_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered component labels pointing to various parts such as air intake, fan, and control panel.1 All around the interior rearview mirror 15
2 Control Display 16
3 Glove compartment 167
4 Air vent 157
5 Hazard warning system 216


Central locking system 36
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
7 Automatic climate control 152
8 Controller with buttons 16
9 Parking brake 62


Automatic Hold 63
10 PDG Park Distance Control 137
Top View 141
Rearview camera 139
Parking assistant 145
Side View 143


HDC Hill Descent Control 119
11 Driving Dynamics Control 121


DSC Dynamic Stability Control 117
12 Transmission selector lever
All around the headliner

text_image
1 2 SOS 3 PASS AIR BAG OFF 4 5 41 Intelligent Emergency Request 216
2 Glass sunroof, powered 43
3 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag 94
4 Reading lamps 91
5 Interior lamps 90
iDrive
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location.

Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and posing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.
Controls at a glance
Controls

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.
Control Display
Hints
To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions.
Do not place objects close to the Control Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.
Switching off

Press the button.
- "Switch off control display"

text_image
Options Split screen Switch off control display Profile settings Display Owner's Manual Reset current profile Rename current profileSwitching on
Press the controller again to switch the screen back on.
Controller
Select menu items and create settings.
- Turn.

natural_image
Close-up of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating rotation or cycle (no text or symbols)2. Press.

natural_image
Close-up of a car dashboard knob with a white striped pointer and triangular buttons (no text or symbols visible)3. Move in four directions.

natural_image
Close-up of a black rotary knob with four directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)Buttons on controller
| Press the button Function |
| MENU Open the main menu. |
| RADIO Opens the Radio menu. |
| MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia menu. |
| NAV Opens the Navigation menu. |
| TEL Opens the Telephone menu. |
| BACK Displays the previous panel. |
| OPTION Opens the Options menu. |
Operating concept
Opening the main menu

Press the button.

text_image
Main menu Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info SettingsThe main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

text_image
Main menu Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info Settings2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▶ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.
▶ Move the controller to the right.
A new panel is opened on top of the previous display.

text_image
FM Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96.3 KLASSIK 100.0 MHz 101.3 MHzWhite arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu
When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
▶ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed.
▶ Press the menu button on the controller twice.
Opening the Options menu

Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.

text_image
Options ✓ Split screen Switch off control display FM Display Owner's Manual ☐ HD Radio reception ☐ RDS RadioAdditional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
This area remains unchanged.
▶ Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio".
If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
- Select a field.
- Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

text_image
Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting: PDC Gong- Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. It indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
☐ The function is deactivated.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock

- MENU Press the button. The main menu is displayed.
- Turn the controller until "Settings" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

text_image
Main menu Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Office ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info Settings- If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".
- Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

text_image
Settings ✓ Time/Date Language/Units Tone Speed Climate Lighting Doors/key- Turn the controller until "Time:" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

text_image
Time/Date Time: 09:30 Format: 24 h Date: 27.05.2012 Format: tt.mm.jjjj- Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.
- Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right:
Time.
▶ Current entertainment source.
▶ Sound output, on/off.
▶ Wireless network reception strength.
▶ Telephone status.
▶ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
... Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes: searching for network.
... Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
▲ Roaming is active.
Symbol Meaning
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter the PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
gracenote Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched off.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
- Press the button.
- "Split screen"
Selecting the display

Press the button.
- "Split screen"
- Move the controller until the split screen is selected.
- Press the controller or select "Split screen content".
- Select the desired menu item.

text_image
Split screen content ✓ Split screen Map facing north Map direction of travel Map perspective view Position ✓ Onboard info Trip computerProgrammable memory buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and entry points into the menu.
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Saving a function
- Highlight the function via the iDrive.
- 1...8 Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.
Running a function
1...8 Press the button.
The function will run immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

text_image
1 2 3 4 Owner's Manual 5 - Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation ConnectedDrive Vehicle Info SettingsTo display short information: touch the button.
To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period.
Deleting the button assignments
- Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx. five seconds.
- "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
- Turn the controller: select letters or numbers.
- Select additional letters or numbers if needed.
- "OK": confirm the entry.
Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers:
Symbol Function
← Press the controller: delete the letter or number.
← Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers:
Symbol Function
A^B_C Enter the letters.
1@+ Enter the numbers.
abc or ABC move the controller up.
Without navigation system
@A A ^a Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically.
The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
▶ Only those letters are offered during the entry for which data is available.
Destination search: town/city names can be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display.
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
The concept
▶ Most functions that are displayed on the Control Display can be operated by spoken commands via the voice activation system. The system prompts you to make your entries.
▶ Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system.
The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.
▶ »...« Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identified.
Set the language, refer to page 86.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.

The command is displayed in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indicates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function in this case via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation system

Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or >Cancel.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which menu is currently displayed on the Control Display.
Short commands exist for many functions.
Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can also be selected via the voice activation system. Speak these list entries exactly as they are displayed in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the available commands read out loud for you: »Voice commands«
For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud.
Executing functions using short commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, nearly irrespective of which menu item is currently selected, e.g., >Vehicle status>.
List of short commands of the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Communication Owner's Manual.
Help dialog for the voice activation system
Calling up help dialog: >Help<
Additional commands for the help dialog:
Help with examples: information about the current operating options and the most important commands for them are announced.
▶ Help with voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.
Example: playing back a CD
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller.
-
Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.
-
Press the button on the steering wheel.
-
»Multimedia« The medium last played is played back.
-
C D<
-
C D drive<
-
Track ...<, e.g., CD track 4.
Via short command
Playback of the CD can also be started via a short command.
-
Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.
-
Press the button on the steering wheel.
-
C D drive track ...<, e.g., CD track 4.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version.
In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form.
On the Control Display:
- "Settings"
- "Language/Units"
- "Speech mode:"
- Select the setting.

text_image
Speech mode ✓ Standard ShortAdjusting the volume
Turn the volume button while giving an instruction until the desired volume is set.
The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.
The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Notes on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 216, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis, and speed.
▶ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.
▶ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun-roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▶ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are described therein.
Components of the integrated Owner's Manual
The integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of information or access possibilities.
Quick Reference Guide
Located in the Quick Reference is important information for the operation of the vehicle, the operation of basic vehicle functions or for what to do in the event of a flat tire. This information can also be displayed during driving.
Search by pictures
Information and descriptions based on illustrations can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index.
Select components

Press the button.
-
Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
-
Press the controller.
-
Selecting desired range:
▶ "Quick reference"
▶ "Search by pictures"
▶ "Owner's Manual"

text_image
Vehicle Info Quick reference Search by pictures ✓ Owner's Manual Onboard info Trip computer Vehicle statusLeafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page.

Leaf back.

Leaf forward.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened directly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu:

-
☐ Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.
-
"Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays:

-
Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.
-
"Display Owner's Manual"
-
Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.

- ☐ Press the button again to return to the function displayed last.

- ☐ Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly.
Storing
- "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
- 1...8 Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.
Executing
1...8 Press the button. The Owner's Manual is displayed immediately.

text_image
START STOP ENGINE Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 877 - VI/13Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control

text_image
1 2 3 41 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Trunk lid
4 Panic mode, headl. courtesy delay feat.
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls with keys.
Every remote control contains a replaceable battery.
The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car. Personal Profile, refer to page 31.
Information on the required maintenance isstored in the remote control as well. Servicedata in the remote control, refer to page 208
Integrated key

text_image
Diagram showing a device component with labeled parts 1 and 2, indicating parts of a device or connector.Press the button on the back of the remote control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▶ Driver's door.
Storage compartment in the front center armrest.
The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 37.
Replacing the battery

text_image
Diagram of a car door handle with numbered arrows indicating parts of the handle and lock mechanism- Take the integrated key out of the remote control.
- Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
- Remove the cover of the battery compartment; see arrow 2.
- Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards.
- Press the cover closed.

Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.
New remote controls
You can obtain new remote controls from your service center.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.
Emergency detection of remote control
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following:
▶ Interference of radio transmission to remote control by external sources.
▶ Discharged battery in the remote control.
▶ Interference of radio transmission by mobile devices in close proximity to the remote control.
▶ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mobile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an attempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.
Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a black key inserted into the seat area (no text or symbols visible)If a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote control vertically against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences.
The settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated.
The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored profile is called up.
Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control.
The individual settings are stored for three Personal Profiles and one guest profile.
Transmitting the settings
Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Profile function. For more information, contact your service center.
Transmission takes place via:
The USB interface in the center armrest onto a USB device.
▶ BMW Online.
Profile management
Opening the profiles
A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control currently in use.
- "Settings"
- "Profiles"
- Select a profile.
Called up profile is assigned to the remote control being used at the time.
Renaming profiles
- "Settings"
- "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
- Open "Options".
- "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values.
- "Settings"
- "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
- Open "Options".
- "Reset current profile"
Importing profiles
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile.
- "Settings"
- "Profiles"
- "Import profile"
- BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface, refer to page 167: "USB device"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop for example.
- "Settings"
- "Profiles"
- "Export profile"
- BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface, refer to page 167: "USB device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile can be used to make individual settings without affecting the three Personal Profiles.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile.
- "Settings"
- "Profiles"
The current profile is selected.
- Open "Guest".
- Create the settings.
Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile.
- "Settings"
- "Profiles"
- Open "Options".
- "Display user list at startup"
Personal Profile settings
The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile.
▶ Collision warning: warning time.
Exterior mirror position.
▶ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to last.
▶ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings.
- Driving Dynamics Control: sport program.
▶ Driver's seat position: automatic retrieval after unlocking.
Programmable memory buttons: assignment.
▶ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, position and rotation of the display.
▶ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time setting.
▶ Tone: tone settings.
▶ Automatic climate control: settings.
▶ Steering wheel position.
▶ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice output on/off.
▶ Night Vision with pedestrian detection.
▶ Intelligent Safety: individual settings.
▶ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the signal tone volume.
▶ Radio: stored stations, station listened to last, special settings.
▶ Rearview camera: selection of functions and type of display.
▶ Side View: selection of the display type.
▶ Language on the Control Display.
▶ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/off.
▶ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting, on/off.
Daytime running lights: current setting.
▶ Triple turn signal activation.
▶ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or after starting to drive.
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:
▶ Doors.
Trunk lid.
▶ Fuel filler flap.
Operating from the outside
▶ Via the remote control.
▶ Via the driver's door lock.
▶ Via the door handles.
▶ Via the button in the trunk lid.
The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote control:
▶ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the theft protection is activated/deactivated. Theft protection prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or the door opener.
The welcome lamps, interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
The alarm system, refer to page 40, is armed or disarmed.
Operating from the inside

natural_image
Front view of a car air conditioner unit with a mounted sensor or connector (no visible text or symbols)Via the button for the central locking system. If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.
Opening and closing: from the outside
Using the remote control
General information

Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the inside. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.
Unlocking

Press the button on the remote control.
The vehicle is unlocked.
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy lamps are switched on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. Create the settings, refer to page 39.
Convenient opening
The remote control can be used to simultaneously open the windows and the glass sunroof.

Press and hold the button on the remote control.
The windows are opened, the glass sunroof is tilted and the sliding visor moves back.
Releasing the button stops the motion.
Locking

Press the button on the remote control.

Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.
Switching on interior lamps and courtesy lamps

Press the button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy delay feature

Briefly press the button on the remote control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Opening the trunk lid

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle has been unlocked.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed.
Malfunction
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the remote control, the battery may be discharged or there may be interference from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc.
If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at the door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▶ LX8CAS2.
MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information

natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a circular opening, showing no text or symbols
Locking from the outside
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.

Remove the key before pulling the door handle
Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.
In some country-specific versions, the alarm system is triggered if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control.
In some vehicle equipment versions, only the driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the door lock.
Locking the doors and trunk lid at once
To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:
- With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking system in the interior.
- Unlock and open the driver's or front passenger door.
-
Lock the vehicle.
-
Lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock, or
▶ Press down the lock button of the front passenger door and close the door from the outside.
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the remote control.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or unlock the vehicle using the integrated key via the door lock on the driver's door.
Opening and closing: from the inside
Locking and unlocking

natural_image
Front view of a car air conditioner grille with a central control panel (no text or symbols visible)Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the doors and the trunk lid when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening
Either unlock the doors together using the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the arm-rest or
▶ Pull the door opener twice individually on each door: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
Doors
Automatic Soft Closing
To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed automatically.

Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Trunk lid
Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening.
Opening from the outside

natural_image
Front view of a car's rear bumper with a white arrow pointing to the nose area (no text or symbols visible)▶ Press on the top half of the BMW emblem.
Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.
Opening from the inside

Push the button in the driver's foot-well.
If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if it is not locked.
Closing

natural_image
Top-down view of a gray electronic device casing with two recessed compartments and mounting holes (no text or symbols visible)Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid.

Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.
Locking the vehicle

natural_image
Black and white icon of a lock inside a rectangular button with an upward arrow, next to stacked books (no text or symbols)Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid. When the driver's door is closed, the vehicle is completely locked.
Locking separately
The trunk lid can be locked separately with the switch in the front passenger glove compartment.

- Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. - Trunk lid not secured, arrow 2.
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the central locking system.
If the center arm rest is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked using valet service. The infrared remote control can be handed out without the key.
Emergency unlocking

natural_image
Simple triangular warning symbol with a small human figure inside, no text or numbers present.Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following functions:
▶ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▶ Convenient closing.
▶ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
▶ Start the engine.
Functional requirements
There are no external sources of interference nearby.
To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle.
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
The engine can only be started if the remote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison with ordinary remote control
The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons of the remote control or Comfort Access.
Unlocking

text_image
Diagram showing a car interior with two directional arrows labeled 1 and 2 pointing to a specific area.Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button on the remote control.
Locking

text_image
Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts 1 and 2, indicating directional or flow direction.Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the ⚙button on the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.
Convenient closing
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed.

Monitor the closing process
Monitor the closing process to ensure that no one becomes trapped.
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press on the top half of the BMW emblem on the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the button on the remote control.

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is locked inside the vehicle when the trunk lid is closed.
Malfunction
Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc.
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock.
Adjusting
Unlocking
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
- "Settings"
- "Doors/key"
- Select symbol or "Unlock button:"
- Select the desired function:
▶ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.
▶ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or the country-specific variant, you can set whether the doors are also unlocked with the

button on the remote control.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
- "Settings"
- "Doors/key"
- Deactivate or activate the desired confirmation signals.
▶ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
▶ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Automatic locking
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
- "Settings"
- "Doors/key"
- Select the desired function:
▶ "Lock if no door opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened.
▶ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away.
Retrieving the seat, mirror, and steering wheel settings
The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions selected last are stored for the currently used remote control.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated.

Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or objects damaged when the seat is moved back.
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▶ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory is pressed briefly.
Activating the setting
- "Settings"
- "Doors/key"
- "Last seat position autom."
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
▶ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▶ Movements in the vehicle.
Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during attempts to steal a wheel or when towing the car.
▶ Interruptions in battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
▶ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▶ By switching on the hazard warning system.
By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm system
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control, Comfort Access or at the door lock the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system
Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some country-specific versions.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
The trunk lid can be opened even when the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and monitored again if the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off the alarm
▶ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
▶ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the remote control with you, pull on the driver side or front passenger side door handle.
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

natural_image
Top-down view of a car rearview mirror with a black knob and an upward arrow pointing to the nose (no text or symbols)The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
The system is armed.
The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is secured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations:
▶ In automatic car washes.
In duplex garages.
During transport on car-carrying trains, at sea or on a trailer.
▶ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle ked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Power windows
General information

Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the power windows and injure themselves.

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)Opening
Press the switch to the resistance.
The window opens while the switch is held.


Press the switch beyond the resist- point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Convenient opening, refer to page 34, via the remote control.
Closing

Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Pull the switch to the resistance.
The window closes while the switch is held.
Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.
The window closes automatically.
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
Convenient closing, refer to page 38, with Comfort Access.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch protection
Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

No window accessories
Do not install any accessories in the
range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.
Closing without the pinch protection system

Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows:
- Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
- Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.
The window closes without pinch protection.
Safety switch
The following functions can be locked simultaneously, using the switch:
▶ Opening and closing of the rear windows using the switches in the rear.
▶ Operation of the roller sunblinds using the switches in the rear.
Switching on and off

Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operation
Press the safety switch when transporting children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without supervision.
Roller sunblinds
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, for example, from operating the roller blinds using the switches in the rear.
Press the safety switch in the driver's door. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on.
If you are no longer able to move the roller blinds after having activated them consecutively a number of times, the system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let the system cool.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low interior temperatures.
Driver's door controls

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and side door (no visible text or symbols)Roller blind for rear window

Press the button.
Raising and lowering the roller blinds together

Press and hold the button.
Rear door controls

natural_image
Close-up of a car interior panel with control buttons and doorways (no visible text or symbols)Roller blind for the side windows

Press the button.
The roller blind can only be extended or retracted when the side window is closed.
Roller blind for rear window

Press the button.
Raising and lowering the roller blinds together

Press and hold the button.
Glass sunroof, powered with tilt function
General information
The glass sunroof is operational when the ignition is switched on.

Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with airbags and control buttons (no readable text or symbols)Tilting up and closing glass sunroof

▶ Push switch upward briefly. The closed roof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly.

▶ Briefly press out the switch twice in succession toward the rear past the resistance point.
Closed roof is raised and the sliding visor moves all the way back.
To close the switch, press upward briefly or twice forward past the resistance point.
Convenient operation, refer to page 34, via the remote control.
Convenient closing, refer to page 38, with Comfort Access.
Opening/closing the sliding visor

▶ Press the switch in the desired direction to the resistance point and hold it there. The sliding visor moves while the switch is being held.
▶ Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point.
The sliding visor moves automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a glass sunroof closes, the closing action is interrupted.
The sunroof is tilted again.

Danger of pinching even with pinch protection
Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.
Closing without the pinch protection system
If there is an external danger or if, e. g., icing of the glass sunroof prevents automatic closing, push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the roof can only be operated to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the roof closes without pinch protection.

Keep the closing path clear
Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is complete:
▶ Initialization begins within 15 seconds and is completed when the sunroof and sliding visor are completely closed.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with:
▶ Safety belts, refer to page 48.
▶ Head restraints, refer to page 49.
Airbags, refer to page 92.
Seats
Adjusting
General information

Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline the backrest on the front passenger side too far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.
Middle seat
The 6 series Gran Coupe is designed as a 4+1-seater vehicle. The middle seat is of limited usefulness. It is recommended that this seat only be used by persons who can use the backrest as a substitute for the head restraint.
Adjusting the head restraints, refer to page 49.
At a glance

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 Active seat
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
5 Backrest, head restraint
6 Shoulder support
7 Forward/back, height, tilt
8 Thigh support
2 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer to page 39, for this is activated.
Adjustments in detail
- Forward/back.

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with control panels and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)- Height.

natural_image
Interior view of a car air conditioner control panel with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)- Seat tilt.

natural_image
Top-down view of a car dashboard with control panels and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)- Backrest tilt.

natural_image
Top-down view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)Thigh support
Multifunctional seat

natural_image
Top-down view of a car dashboard with control panels and directional arrows (no text or symbols)Adjust the position using the lever.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

▶ Press the front/rear section of the switch.
The curvature is increased/decreased.
▶ Press the upper/lower section of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Backrest width

Change the width of the back-rest using the side wings to adjust the lateral support.
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Shoulder support

natural_image
Top-down view of a car's air conditioner control panel with buttons and a white arrow pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols)Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▶ Results in a relaxed seating position.
▶ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
Active seat
Active adjustment of the seat cushion's contours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back pain.

natural_image
Interior view of a car air conditioner control panel with buttons and a white arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on panels)Press the button. The LED lights up.
Changing the seat position
Requirements
▶ Vehicle at a standstill.
When the door is open, the seat is accessible from the side on which the door is open.
For safety reasons, the driver's seat cannot be adjusted if only the door behind the driver is open.
Controls

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)Press and hold the button until the seat has moved to the desired position. Releasing the button stops the motion.
Front seat heating

natural_image
Interior view of a car air conditioning unit with dual rotary controls and function buttons (no readable text or symbols)Switching on

Press the button once for each temperature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automatically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 180, is activated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off

Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and backrest can be distributed in different ways.
- "Climate"
- "Front seat heating"
- Select the required seat.
- Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution.
Rear seat heating

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with directional control buttons (no text or symbols visible)Switching on

Press the button once for each temperature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automatically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 180, is activated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off

Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Active seat ventilation, front
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehicle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures.

natural_image
Interior view of a car air conditioning unit with multiple directional control buttons (no readable text or symbols)Switching on

Press the button once for each ventilation level.
The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit.
After a short time, the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent excessive cooling.
Switching off

Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has five seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
Hints
Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting on the left and right.
The center rear seat belt buckle is solely intended for the center passenger.

One person per safety belt
Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.

Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen.
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breakable objects, or be pinched.

Reduction of restraining effect
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the safety belt may be reduced.
Buckling the belt

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the steering wheel and seatbelt, with a white arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.
Unbuckling the belt
- Hold the belt firmly.
- Press the red button in the belt buckle.
- Guide the belt back into its reel.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and passenger's seat

The indicator lamp flashes or lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned cor-
rectly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Damage to safety belts
In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage:
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

Checking and replacing safety belts
Have the work performed only by your service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint
If possible, correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.
Front
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain severity, the active head restraint automatically reduces the distance from the head.

Reduced protective function
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers, on the head restraints.
▶ Only attach accessories approved by BMW to the seat or head restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the personal safety of the occupants will be endangered.
In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage:
Have the active headrest checked and if necessary replaced.
Adjusting the height

natural_image
Top-down view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating left and right movement (no text or symbols)Adjusting electrically.
Distance to the back of the head

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, neck, and side panel with a belt buckle (no text or symbols visible)Forward: pull.
▶ Back: press the button and push the head restraint toward the rear.
Adjusting the side extensions

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a black seatbelt with white directional arrows indicating left and right sides (no text or symbols)Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory
General information

natural_image
Interior view of a car air conditioner control panel with buttons and dials (no text or symbols visible)Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions can be stored and retrieved for each remote control. The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored.
Storing
-
Switch on the ignition.
-
Set the desired position.
-
Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.
-
Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:

Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings

Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an accident.
Comfort function
-
Open the driver's door.
-
Switch off the ignition.
-
Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjusting the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
- Close the driver's door or switch on the ignition.
- Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is completed.
Calling up of a seat position deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▶ Open or close the door or trunk lid.
▶ Press a button on the remote control.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
At a glance

text_image
Diagram of a car air intake control panel with labeled buttons and a central knob1 Adjusting
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Estimating distances correctly
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the mirror setting is stored for the remote control in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the setting for this function is active.
Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Adjusting electrically

The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 51.
Adjusting manually
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.
Automatic Curb Monitor
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front passenger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.
Activating

e mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
- Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the passenger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out

Press the button.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
In car washes.
In narrow streets.
For folding back mirrors that were folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before washing the car in an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed. Photocells are used for control in the Interior rear view mirror, refer to page 53.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature
The concept

natural_image
Two grayscale images showing a car rearview mirror with an upward arrow indicator (no text or symbols)Photocells are used for control:
In the mirror glass.
On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
Keep the photocells clean.
Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
General information

Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.
Adjusting

natural_image
Top-down view of a vehicle's crosswalk with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)The steering wheel can be adjusted in four directions.
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 51.
Assistance getting in and out
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the highest position to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle.
Steering wheel heating

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)Switching on/off

Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
▶ Off: the LED goes out.
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
The right place for children
Note

Children in the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger themselves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.
Children should always be in the rear
Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rear
Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of front passenger side airbags, refer to page 94.
Note

Deactivated front passenger airbags
If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.
Installing child restraint fixing systems
Hints

Manufacturer's information for child re- straint fixing systems
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the protective effect can be impaired.

Lock the rear seat backrests in position
Before installing a child restraint system, make sure that the rear seat backrests are locked; otherwise, the protective effect is not guaranteed and there is an increased risk of injury for the child in the event of an accident.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 94.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest position to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.
Do not change the seat position and height after this.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position.

Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, the back-rest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.
Child seat security

natural_image
Interior view of a car seat assembly with no visible text or symbolsThe rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
Locking the safety belt
- Pull out the belt webbing completely.
- Secure the child restraint fixing system with the belt.
- Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
- Unbuckle the belt buckle.
- Remove the child restraint fixing system.
- Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in completely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil- dren.
Note

Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufacturer; otherwise, the level of protection may be reduced.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Correctly engage the lower LATCH anchors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fixing system, pull the belt away from the child restraint fixing system.

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with two white arrows pointing to specific sections (no text or symbols visible)Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the seat cover between the back-rest and the seat cushion.
Open the slide fastener to access the anchors.
Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing systems
-
Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer to the user's manual of the system.
-
Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap
Mounting points

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing three white arrows pointing upward on the back panel (no text or symbols present)There are three mounting points for child restraint fixing systems with a tether strap.
Note

Mounting eyes
Only use the mounting eyes for the upper retaining strap to secure child restraint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.
Retaining strap guide

Retaining strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in the event of an accident.

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 61 Direction of travel
2 Upper retaining strap
3 Head restraint.
4 Rear window shelf
5 Mounting point/eye
6 Hook for upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point
- Lift the cover over the mounting point.
- Guide the upper retaining strap over the head restraint.
- Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the mounting eyes.
- Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
Locking the doors and windows
Rear doors

natural_image
Close-up of a car door panel with directional arrows indicating compression or movement (no text or symbols)Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 42.
Driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.
The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed when you press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.
The ignition switches off automatically:
▶ When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are switched on.
▶ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.
Note
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Transmission position P with the ignition off
When the ignition is switched off, position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off accidentally.
The ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the low beams are activated.
▶ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off.
When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.
▶ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if the driver's door is open and the low beams are switched off.
When the ignition is switched off, by opening or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains active.
Radio ready state
Activate radio ready state:
▶ When the engine is running: press the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation.
The radio ready state switches off automatically:
▶ After approx. 8 minutes.
▶ When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.
▶ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.
Starting the engine
Hints

Enclosed areas
Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.

Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, set the parking brake and place the transmission in position P or neutral to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Repeated starting in quick succession
Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds.
Automatic transmission
Starting the engine
- Depress the brake pedal.
- Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Engine stop
Hints

Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot start the engine.

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; otherwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.
Before driving into a car wash
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car wash, heed the information regarding Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 221.
Automatic transmission
Switching off the engine
- Engage transmission position P with the vehicle stopped.
- Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio ready state is switched on.
- Set the parking brake.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in a traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off.
Certain vehicle components may experience additional wear as a result of this system.
Automatic mode
The Auto Start/Stop function is operational after each engine start.
This function is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions:
Automatic transmission:
The selector lever is in transmission position D.
The brake pedal remains pressed while the vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold.
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.
The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster

The display indicates that the automatic engine start-stop function is ready for an automatic engine start.

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been satisfied.
Note
The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:
▶ External temperature too low.
The external temperature is high and automatic climate control is running.
The passenger compartment has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.
The engine is not yet at operating temperature.
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.
▶ After driving in reverse.
Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.
▶ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▶ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
The parking assistant is activated.
▶ Stop-and-go traffic.
The transmission selector lever is in position N or M/S.
▶ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the following conditions:
▶ Automatic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: press the accelerator.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met.
The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.
The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lamps light up for varying lengths of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.
Note
Even if driving away was not intended, the deactivated engine starts up automatically in the following situations:
Excessive warming of the passenger compartment when the cooling function is switched on.
The steering wheel is turned.
▶ Automatic transmission: the transmission position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.
▶ Automatic transmission: the transmission position is changed from P to N, D, R or M/S.
Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.
▶ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
Excessive cooling of the passenger compartment when the heating is switched on.
Activating/deactivating the system manually
Using the button

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)
Press the button.
▶ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.
▶ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e.g., when leaving it.
- Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.
Transmission position P is engaged automatically.
- Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, such as when the driver is detected to be absent.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches of the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked.

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with control panels and a circular vent (no visible text or symbols)Setting

Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.

The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; otherwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.
While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency braking function:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator lamp lights up red, a signal sounds and the brake lamps light up.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models.
If the vehicle is braked to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, the parking brake remains set.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:

Automatic transmission: Press the switch while the brake is pressed or
transmission position P is engaged.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic Release in cars with automatic transmission
For automatic release, operate the accelerator pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Subject to the following requirements, the parking brake is automatically released by operation of the accelerator pedal:
▷ Engine on.
▶ Drive position engaged.
▶ Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Inadvertent operation of the accelerator pedal
Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not operated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is set in motion and there is a risk of an accident.
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving away.

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with control panels and a circular vent (no visible text or symbols)For your safety
Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated and the parking brake is set:
The engine is switched off.
A door is opened and driver's safety belt is unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill using the parking brake.

The indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models.

Leaving the vehicle with the engine running
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, engage position P of the automatic transmission and ensure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
Activating
This function can be activated when the driver's door is closed and the safety belt is fastened, and while driving.

Press the button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light up.

The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating

Press the button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, Automatic Hold is deactivated automatically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is automatically secured against rolling after braking to a standstill.

The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.

The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

Before driving into a car wash
Before driving into the car wash, deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the parking brake will be set when the vehicle is stationary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold.
PARK
The indicator lamp changes from green to red.
(P)
The parking brake is not set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is
deactivated.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models
Automatic Hold remains activated during the engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/Stop function.

Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot release the parking brake.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving it.
Manual release
The parking brake can be released manually in the event of a power failure or electrical fault.

Before releasing, secure the vehicle against rolling
Before releasing the parking brake manually, and whenever you park the vehicle with the parking brake released, ensure that position P of the automatic transmission is engaged.
Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the inclination of the road, e.g., with a wheel chock; otherwise, there is the danger of the vehicle rolling.
Unlocking
Have the malfunction corrected
If the parking brake has been released manually in response to a malfunction, only technicians can return it to operation.
Have the malfunction corrected by your service center.
After a power failure
Only put the parking brake into operation after a power failure
The parking brake should only be put into operation again if it was manually released due to an interruption in the supply of electrical power. Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the parking brake will function properly.
Putting the parking brake into operation
-
Switch on the ignition.
-
Press the switch while the brake is depressed or transmission position P is engaged.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation. Any sounds associated with this are normal.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models.
Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a central control panel with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols visible)Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever to the resistance point.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated:
- "Settings"
- "Lighting"
- "Triple turn signal"
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher

text_image
Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning.▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▶ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.

No wiper operation on dry windshield
Do not use the windshield wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.
Switching on

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)Press the wiper levers up.
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
▶ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.
Switching off and brief wipe

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a central control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols visible)Press the wiper levers down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.
▶ Brief wipe: press down once.
To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor
The concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind-shield, directly behind the interior rearview mirror.
Activating/deactivating

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a black connector and directional arrow indicating a switch (no text or symbols visible)Press the button on the wiper lever.
The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wiping operation is started. At temperatures below 32 ^/0 ^ , a wiping operation is not started.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.
Rain sensor, sensitivity

natural_image
Top-down view of a car interior showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)Turn the thumbwheel.
Clean the windshield, headlamps

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with control panels and a directional arrow pointing to the vehicle (no text or symbols visible)Pull the wiper lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind-shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regular intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on.

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; otherwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated while the ignition is switched on.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example.
- Switch the ignition on and off again.
- Under frosty conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind-shield.
- Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.
- Switch on the ignition.
- Press the wiper levers down. The wipers move to their resting position and are ready for operation.
Washer fluid
General information

Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injury if it is used incorrectly.
Therefore, keep it away from sources of ignition.
Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children.
Follow the notes and instructions on the container.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent.
Washer fluid reservoir

Adding washer fluid
Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.

natural_image
Illustration of a speedometer icon with a warning symbol, set against a blurred background of roads and buildings (no text or symbols)All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer concentrate and tap water and – if required – with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of different manufacturers, because otherwise it can result in clogging of the windshield washer nozzles.
For the capacity, refer to technical data.
Automatic transmission with Steptronic
Transmission positions
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are available.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 58, position P is engaged automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▶ After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to page 59, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 58, and when position R or D is engaged.
▶ With the ignition is off, if position N is engaged.
If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that position P of the automatic transmission is engaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position
▶ Transmission position P can only be disengaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed.
With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.

Depress the brake until you start driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Engaging D, R and N

text_image
R N N DBriefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with control panel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)Press unlock button, in order to:
Engage R.
▶ Shift out of P.
Engaging P

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a central gear shift lever (no text or symbols visible)Press button P.
Sport program and manual mode
Activating the sport program

natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)Push the selector lever to the left out of transmission position D.
In the instrument cluster, DS is displayed, or the engaged gear, e.g., S1 with the Sport automatic transmission.
The sport program of the transmission is activated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
-
Push the selector lever to the left out of transmission position D.
-
Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g., M1.
Once maximum engine speed is attained, or if the engine is getting too hot, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode
To shift down: press the selector lever forward.
To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds and when necessary due to the temperature of the drivetrain, e.g., down-
shifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Sport automatic transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode
For vehicles with Sport automatic transmissions, automatic shift operations are not performed, at maximum engine speed for example, if one of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▶ TRACTION activated.
▶ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
Ending the sport program/manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles

natural_image
Interior view of a BMW car dashboard showing the steering wheel and logo (no text or symbols on the car itself)The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode.
If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle is not accelerated for a certain time, the system switches back into automatic mode if the selector lever is in transmission position D.
▶ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▶ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Shift lights in the instrument display
The concept
Shift lights display the optimum shift point for sport displays in the multifunction instrument display. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle acceleration is achieved.
Display in the instrument display

text_image
Timor x 1008 M3 1 2 7 150 3 > 6▶ Current engine speed is displayed in the tachometer.
Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields indicate the upcoming upshift moment.
Arrow 2: fields are illuminated in red. Do not wait any further to shift.
When the maximum possible speed is reached, the entire display flashes. When the maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of fuel is interrupted in order to protect the engine. Speeds in this range must be avoided.
Displays in the instrument cluster

The transmission position is displayed, e.g.: P.
Displays
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip-
ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Instrument cluster

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 71 Fuel gauge 78
2 Speedometer
3 Indicator/warning lamps 76
4 Tachometer 78
5 Oil temperature 78
6 Electronic displays 73
7 Reset miles 79
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster

text_image
1 2 3 4 51 Messages, e.g. Check Control 76
Time 79
2 Range 79
3 Computer 83
4 Navigation display, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication.
Service requirements 80
Miles/trip miles 79
5 Selection list, e.g., radio 83
Current fuel consumption 80
Energy recovery 80
External temperature 79
Transmission display 71
Multifunctional instrument display
The concept
The instrument dispaly is a variable display. When the driving mode is changed, the ap-
pearance is changed to reflect the new driving mode. The change of appearance can be deactivated in the Control Display.
Some of the displays in the instrument display may differ from the way they are shown in this owner's manual.
At a glance

text_image
1 2 3 2 4 5 2 6 8 7 21 Fuel gauge 78
2 Indicator/warning lamps 76
3 Speedometer
4 Variable displays
5 Tachometer 78
Selection lists 83
ECO PRO displays 180
6 Oil temperature 78
7 Computer 83
8 Reset miles 79
Switching the change of display on and off
You can set whether the instrument display automatically changes to the ECO PRO or SPORT in the display when you switch driving modes.
- "Settings"
- "Info display"
- "ECO PRO Info"
or"Driving mode view"
With Professional Navigation System: switching zoom function on/off Switching
You can program whether the current speed is to appear enlarged in the speedometer.
- "Settings"
- "Info display"
- "Magnifier function"
ECO PRO displays

text_image
1 2 3 5 80 100 120 60 40 20 0 800 250 4 CHARGE POWER Efficient Dynamics ECO PRO1 Speedometer
2 Variable displays: ECO PRO Tips, Deceleration assistant instructions, Driver assist system displays
3 Efficiency display 180
In ECO PRO driving mode, the instrument display switches to the ECO PRO displays. These displays support a driving style that saves on
4 Transmission display 71
5 ▷ Blue: bonus range
Gray: range
fuel consumption with more prominent representation of the efficiency display and various ECO PRO tips.
Sport displays

gauge
| Model | Value | |---|---| | M3 | 83 | | SPORT+ | 6 | | M3 | 5 |1 Speedometer
2 Tachometer
3 Transmission display 71
In the Sport and Sport+ modes, the instrument display switches to the sport displays. This display supports a sporty driving style with more prominent representation of the tachometer, the transmission displays, and the vehicle speed.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
4 Shift lights, when appropriately equipped
5 Performance display
6 Variable displays
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Display.
Indicator/warning lamps
The indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Overview: indicator/warning lamps
Symbol Function or system

Turn signal.

Parking brake.

Parking brake in Canadian models.

Automatic hold.

Front fog lamps.

High beams.

High-beam Assistant.

Parking lamps, headlamp control.

Active Cruise Control.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control: collision warning.

Cruise control.

Lane departure warning.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Symbol Function or system

Tire Pressure Monitor. Flat Tire Monitor.

Safety belts.

Airbag system.

Steering system.

Engine functions.

Engine functions in Canadian models.

Brake system.

Brake system in Canadian models.

ABS Antilock Brake System.

ABS Antilock Brake System in Canadian models.

At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.
The supplementary text of urgent messages is automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected.
"Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
"Service request"
Contact the service partner.
"Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a car's seatbelt switch and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)Press the computer button on the turn signal lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically.
▶ Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control messages
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Vehicle status"
- "Check Control"
- Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages that are displayed during driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.
Fuel gauge

The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.
US models: the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 188.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter-rupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature

▶ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds.
Normal operating temperature: the pointer is in the middle or in the left half of the temperature display.
Hot engine: the pointer is at the high temperature end. A Check Control message is also displayed.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 207.
Odometer and trip odometer

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▶ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Display/reset miles

Press the knob.
When the ignition is switched off, the time, the external temperature and the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.
External temperature
External temperature warning

If the indicator drops to +37 °F/+3 °C or lower, a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is the increased danger of ice.

Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 °F/+3 °C, there can be a risk of ice on roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example, to avoid the increased risk of an accident.
Time

The time is displayed at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format, refer to page 85.
Date

The date is displayed in the computer.
Setting the date and date format, refer to page 86.
Range

After the reserve range is reached:
▶ A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
The remaining range is shown on the computer.
When a dynamic driving style is used, such as when cornering quickly, operation of the engine is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.
Displaying the cruising range
- "Settings"
- "Info display"
- "Additional indicators"
The range is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Range when destination guidance is activated in the navigation system

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system, the range up to the destination is displayed.
Current fuel consumption

Displays the current fuel consumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel consumption
- "Settings"
- "Info display"
- "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consumption is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Energy recovery

The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy while coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be lowered.
Service requirements
Display

The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly after the ignition is switched on.
The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist.
With TeleService, data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of your vehicle are automatically transmitted to your service center before the service due date.
Detailed information on service requirements
More information on the scope of service required can be displayed on the Control Display.
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Vehicle status"
- "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.
- Select an entry to call up detailed information.
Symbols
Symbols Description
| OK |
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections. Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly.
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Vehicle status"
-
"Service required"
-
"§ Vehicle inspection"
- "Date:"
- Adjust the settings.
- Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your service center before a service due date.
You can check when your service center was notified.
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Vehicle status"
- Open "Options".
- "Last Service Request"
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel efficient gear in the current driving situation.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and the country-specific version of the vehicle, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the automatic transmission and in the manual transmission.
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the engaged gear is displayed.
Automatic transmission: displays
Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed limit detection with No Passing Information
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected and compared with vehicle interior data, such as for the rain sensor, and are displayed depending on the situation. The system takes into account the information stored in the navigation system and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs.
No Passing Information
No Passing Information in the instrument cluster displays the beginnings and ends of no passing zones detected by the camera. The system accounts for only the beginnings and ends of No Passing zones marked by signs.
No display is shown:
In countries where No Passing zones are primarily identified with road markings.
On routes without signage.
▶ Where there are railroad crossings, highway markings or other situations where no
signage is present, but passing would not be permitted.
Hints

Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation.
The system assists the driver and does not replace the human eye.
At a glance
Camera

natural_image
Top-down view of a car showing the rearview mirror and headrest (no text or symbols visible)The camera is located near the base of the mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
- "Settings"
- "Info display"
- "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instrument cluster via the onboard computer. No Passing Information is displayed together with the activated speed limit information.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Speed limit detection

Current speed limit.

Speed limit detection is not available.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
No Passing Information

▶ Start of No Passing zone.
▶ End of No Passing zone.
▶ No Passing Information not available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
When driving toward bright lights.
When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc.
In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.
▶ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect.
In areas not covered by the navigation system.
When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in the road network.
When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.
▶ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the instrument cluster
The concept

text_image
No One But You ✓ Rock'n Roll Boy Shine A LightThe following can be operated using the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel:
▶ Current audio source.
▶ Redial on telephone.
▶ Activation of the voice activation system.
Activating a list and creating the setting

natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a black rectangular button and directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired setting and confirm it by pressing the thumbwheel.
Computer
Indication in the info display

The information from the on-board computer is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster.
Calling up information on the info display

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the left side of the dashboard with a black key inserted into the seat (no visible text or symbols)Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.
Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information on the info display:
Range.
▶ Average fuel consumption.
▶ Average speed.
Date.
▶ Speed limit detection.
▶ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.
▶ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.
▶ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.
When the arrow view in the Head-up Display is inactive.
▶ ECO PRO bonus range.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the on-board computer is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.
- "Settings"
- "Info display"
- Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough fuel left for less than 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display changes.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period during which the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the onboard computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped do not enter into the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted automatically.
Time of arrival

The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 81, function.
Speed limit
Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the limit
- "Settings"
- "Speed"
- "Warning at:"
- Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.
- Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit
- "Settings"
- "Speed"
- "Warning"
- Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the limit
- "Settings"
- "Speed"
- "Select current speed"
- Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit.
Trip computer
The vehicle features two types of computer.
▶ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary.
▶ "Trip computer": the values provide an overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip computer
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Trip computer"
- "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip computer on the Control Display.
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption or speed
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Onboard info"
- "Consumpt." or "Speed"
- "Yes"
Settings on the Control Display
Time
Setting the time zone
- "Settings"
- "Time/Date"
- "Time zone"
- Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
- "Settings"
- "Time/Date"
- "Time:"
- Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed.
- Press the controller.
- Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed.
- Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
- "Settings"
- "Time/Date"
- "Format:"
- Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Date
Setting the date
- "Settings"
- "Time/Date"
- "Date:"
- Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed.
- Press the controller.
- Make the necessary settings for the month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
- "Settings"
- "Time/Date"
- "Format:"
- Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
- "Settings"
- "Language/Units"
- "Language:"
- Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 23.
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature:
- "Settings"
- "Language/Units"
- Select the desired menu item.
- Select the desired unit.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
- "Settings"
- "Control display"
- "Brightness"
- Turn the controller until the desired brightness is set.
- Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Depending on the light conditions, the brightness control may not be clearly visible.
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
At a glance

text_image
2 1 3 4 5 6 0 71 Rear fog lamps
2 Front fog lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Welcome lamps, Daytime running lights
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam Assistant
7 Instrument lighting
Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control
General information
Switch position: 0, ≡D
Switch position: 0, 3D

If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lamps
Switch position 30 the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Do not use the parking lamps for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 88.
Low beams
Switch position 📋 with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in position ☐ or :the parking and interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
- "Settings"
- "Lighting"
- "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
The low beams stay lit for a short while after the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are switched off and the headlamp flasher is switched on.
Setting the duration
- "Settings"
- "Lighting"
- "Pathway lighting:"
- Set the duration.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control
Switch position the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on.

Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.
Daytime running lights
With the ignition switched on, the daytime running lights light up in position 0, ☑️. After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in position ☑️
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are compulsory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.
- "Settings"
-
"Lighting"
-
"Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Roadside parking lamps

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or control (no text or symbols visible)The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.
Adaptive light control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumination of the road surface.
Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.
Activating
Switch position with the ignition switched on.
The turning lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, only the turning lamp is active.
Self-leveling headlamps
The self-leveling headlamps compensate for acceleration and braking operations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a car's seatbelt switch and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)- Turn the light switch to
- Press the button on the turn signal lever, arrow.


The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
When the lights are switched on, the high beams are switched on and off automatically.
The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

The blue indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams.
Switching the high beams on and off manually

text_image
Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or flow▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▶ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits

Personal responsibility
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.
The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary:
In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.
In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on-coming traffic on freeways.
In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs.
▶ At low speeds.
When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.
Camera

natural_image
Top-down view of a car showing the rearview mirror and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)The camera is located near the base of the mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on.

Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 88, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps.
Instrument lighting
Adjusting

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.
Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.
Interior lamps
General information
The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automatically.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influenced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting.

text_image
Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled buttons and indicators, showing numbered parts 1 and 2.1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lamps on and off

Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps

Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps.
The reading lamps in the rear can be adjusted for optimal direction of the light beam.
When the interior lamps are switched off permanently, the reading lamps cannot be switched on.
Bang & Olufsen High End Surround Sound System
Adjusting speaker lighting
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
The lighting can be individually set.
- "Settings"
- "Lighting"
- "B & O"
- Select the desired lighting setting.
▶ "Off": no lighting.
▶ "Reduced": the speakers in the field of view are hidden while driving.
▶ "On": the speakers are always illuminated.
Safety
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip-
ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Airbags

text_image
Interior view of a car with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbags
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint.
Side airbags
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbags
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags
▶ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▶ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is triggered.
There should be no people, animals, or objects between an airbag and a person.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.
Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instruments and mobile phones.
▶ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.
Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
▶ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.
Do not remove the airbag restraint system.
Do not remove the steering wheel.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the air-bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.
▶ Never modify either the individual components or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.
Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags
Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dismantled and the airbag generator scrapped by your service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explosives.
Non-professional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag system

When the ignition is switch on, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▶ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on.
The warning lamp lights up continuously.

When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in the event of an accident despite corresponding severity of the accident.
Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags
The system determines whether the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the resistance of the human body.
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly.

Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety notes and instructions under Children on the front passenger seat.
Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

text_image
PASS AIR BAG OFFThe indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are activated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fixing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.
The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag
The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver's and front passenger seats.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a corresponding message appears on the Control Display.
Calibrating the front seats
A corresponding message appears on the Control Display.
- Move the respective seat forward all the way.
- Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly.
- Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movement
Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire pressure and tire temperature.
Hints

Tire damage due to external factors Sudden tire damage caused by external ences cannot be indicated in advance.
Pay attention to the other information and indications under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 191, as well when using the system.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable signaling of tire pressure loss is not ensured.
Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Vehicle status"
- "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Status display
The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning relative to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be:
The system is being reset.
Malfunction.
Additional information
The status display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures and tire temperatures. The values shown are current measurement values and may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Vehicle status"
- "Perform reset"
- Start the engine - do not drive away.
- Carry out the reset with "Perform reset".
- Drive away.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the tire inflation pressures set are accepted as reference values. The reset is completed automatically during driving.
After a successfully completed Reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is displayed.
The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the reset resumes automatically.
Low tire pressure message

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the system. The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire pressures before the last reset.
- Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
- Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 201, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.
When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
- Identify the damaged tire. Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset.
If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.
- Rectify the flat tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if necessary.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
- Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
- Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
- Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a d of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.
Required inflation pressure check message
A Check Control message is displayed.
Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out a reset of the system.
In some cases, a wheel was changed without having carried out a reset.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is reported even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.
The tire pressure depends on the temperature of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g., due to driving or because of the heat of the Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also. The tire pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. This behavior may cause a warning to be issued if temperatures fall very sharply.
Malfunction

The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat loss of tire pressure can be detected.
Display in the following situations:
▶ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if necessary.
▶ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.
▶ Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en-
sured. Initialize the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Vehicle status"
- "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set inflation tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Vehicle status"
- "Perform reset"
- Start the engine - do not drive away.
- Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
- Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.
-
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
-
Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 201, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary.
System limits

Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in advance.
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:
▶ When the system has not been initialized.
When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.
▶ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration.
▶ When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
- Identify the damaged tire.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.
If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.
- Rectify the flat tire.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
- Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
- Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
- Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.
Final tire failure Vibrations or lo
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety consists of one or more of the following systems, which can help to avoid an imminent collision. These systems are active automatically every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button:
▶ Collision warning, refer to page 101.
▶ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 106.
Note
Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehicle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

text_image
Car interior panel with six directional icons labeled in Chinese: 甲, 乙, 丙, 丁, 五, 家
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automatically active after each engine start via the start/stop button.

Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out.
Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Collision warning
Depending on how the equipment is equipped, the collision warning system consists of one of the two systems:
▶ Collision warning with City Braking function, refer to page 104;
▶ Collision warning with braking function, refer to page 101
Collision warning with braking function
The concept
The system issues a warning if there is imminent danger of a collision and also includes a braking function.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in conjunction with a camera.
The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a possible danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation.
Detection range

natural_image
Top-down view of four cars driving on a road with a shaded lane (no text or symbols visible)It responds to stationary or moving objects that are within the detection range of the radar system.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

natural_image
Close-up of a car's front panel with six directional icons (arrow, up, down, etc.) on the right side (no text or symbols beyond icons)
Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensor

natural_image
Front view of a BMW sedan showing grille and side grille (no text or symbols visible)The radar sensor is located in the lower area of the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unobstructed.
Camera

natural_image
Top-down view of a car showing the rearview and front-quarter seats with a circular head indicator (no text or symbols)The camera is located near the base of the mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button.

Press the button.
The LED goes out.
Display
Warning stages
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Acute warning with braking function
Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed.
The acute warning prompts the driver to intervene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is accompanied by a braking intervention.
The braking intervention may be executed with maximum braking force and for a brief period only as necessary.
The intervention can bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. No automatic delay occurs.

Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively moving the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the collision warning with braking function to prevent undesired interventions.
Display in the instrument cluster
The collision warning can be issued in the instrument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and acoustically.
Warning stages
Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarning.
Increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver.

Adapting your speed and driving style
The display does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.
System limits

Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Detection range
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
This may result in the warning not being issued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not be detected:
▶ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.
▶ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▶ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▶ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▶ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
In tight curves.
▶ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF.
▶ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or obscured.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.
▶ If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings.
Collision warning with City Braking function
The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system helps to reduce the collision speed.
The system issues a warning if there is imminent danger of a collision and if so brakes independently.
The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the base of the mirror.
The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation.
Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking intervention occurs when appropriate.
Detection range

natural_image
Top-down view of a road with three cars driving on a lane, no text or symbols visibleVehicles are observed when they are traveling in the same direction of movement if they are located within the detection range of the system.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

natural_image
Close-up of a car's front panel with six directional icons (arrow, elephant, down, down, up) on the right side (no text or symbols beyond icons)
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button.

Press the button.
The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function

Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarning.
Increase braking and distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to intervene. During the warning, the maximum braking force is used, even with light pressure on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can assist with a slight braking intervention. The intervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively moving the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the collision warning with braking function to prevent undesired interventions.
System limits

Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Detection range
The system's detection capabilities are limited.
This may result in the warning not being issued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not be detected:
▶ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.
▶ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▶ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▶ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▶ Pedestrians.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
In tight curves.
▶ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF.
▶ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or obscured.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.
If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky.
Prewarning sensitivity
Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings.
Pedestrian warning
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the function warns of an imminent collision with pedestrians during daytime or nighttime.
The function is subdivided into the following systems:
During daytime: Pedestrian warning with city braking function, refer to page 106
At night: Night Vision with pedestrian detection, refer to page 108
Pedestrian warning with city braking function
The concept
The system can help to prevent accidents with pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a collision with pedestrians and includes a braking function.
The system is controlled via the camera in the base of the interior mirror.
General information
The system issues a warning with brightness staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and assists with a brake intervention shortly before a collision.
It responds to persons that are within the detection range of the system.
Detection range

flowchart
graph TD
A["Car"] --> B{Light Path}
B --> C["Path 1"]
B --> D["Path 2"]
The warning area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas.
▶ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.
▶ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

natural_image
Interior view of a car's backrest with six directional icons on the front panel (no text or symbols visible)
Intelligent Safety button
Camera

natural_image
Top-down view of a car showing the rearview mirror and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)The camera is located near the base of the mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button.
Switching off

Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED goes out.
Press the button: the systems are switched off. The LED lights up.
Warning with braking function

Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or making an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to intervene. During the warning, the maximum braking force is used, even with light pressure on the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can assist with a slight braking intervention. The intervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator or by actively moving the steering wheel.
When towing or tow-starting the vehicle, switch off the pedestrian warning to prevent undesired interventions.
System limits

Be alert
Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Detection range
The detection capability of the camera is limited.
This may result in the warning not being issued or being issued late.
For example, the following situations may not be detected:
▶ Partially covered pedestrians.
▶ Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.
▶ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▶ Pedestrians below a body size of approx. 32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations:
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
In tight curves.
▶ If the camera view field or the front wind-shield are dirty or covered.
▶ When driving toward bright lights.
▶ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop knob.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.
Night Vision with Pedestrian and Animal Detection
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detection is a night vision system.
An infrared camera records the area in front of the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings or animals are detected by the system. If necessary, the heat image can be displayed on the Control Display.
Heat image

natural_image
Silhouette of a herd of animals walking across a grassy field with trees in the background (no text or symbols)The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects, a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to detect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second.
Pedestrian and animal detection

natural_image
Silhouette of a person walking on a road with a car in the background, surrounded by trees and buildings (no text or symbols)Object detection and warning only functions in darkness.
Warm objects that are similar in shape to human beings are detected by the system.
In addition, the system also detects animals above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer.
With heat image activated on the Control Display:
People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue.
Animals detected by the system are displayed in a darker yellow.
Under good ambient conditions, the object detection operates within the following distance ranges:
▶ Pedestrian detection: up to approx. 330 ft/100 m
▶ Detection of large animals: up to approx. 490 ft/150 m
▶ Detection of medium animals: up to approx. 230 ft/70 m
Environmental influences can limit the availability of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is located in a residential area, the animal detection is temporarily switched off.
Notes

Personal responsibility
Night Vision cannot replace the driver's personal judgment of the visibility conditions and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is adjusted; otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.
At a glance
Buttons in the vehicle

natural_image
Close-up of a car's front panel with six directional icons (arrow, up, down, down, left, right) on black buttons (no text or symbols beyond icons)
Intelligent Safety button

Switch on/switch off heat image
Camera

natural_image
Close-up of a car's front grille with a white arrow pointing to a small circular detail (no text or symbols)The camera is automatically heated when the external temperatures are low.
The camera is automatically cleaned together with the headlamps.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button, the system is automatically active at dark.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button.

Press the button.
The LED goes out.
Switching on heat image additionally
The heat image from the Night Vision camera can also be displayed on the Control Display. This function has no effect on object detection.

Press the button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the Control Display.
Adjustments via the iDrive
With heat image switched on:
-
Press the controller.
-
Select brightness or contrast.
▶ Select the symbol.
▶ Select the symbol.
- Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
Display
Warning of people or animals in danger
If a collision with a person or an animal detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
Warning area in front of the vehicle

flowchart
graph TD
A["Car"] --> B{Light Path}
B --> C["Path 1"]
B --> D["Path 2"]
The warning area for the pedestrian warning consists of two parts:
▶ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.
▶ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left.
In the animal warning, no distinction is made between the central or expanded area.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed increases, the area becomes longer and wider, for example.
Prewarning

The yellow symbol is displayed when a person is detected in the central area, arrow 1, immediately in front of the ve-
hicle.
The yellow symbol is displayed when a person in the extended area, arrow 2, is moving from the right or left towards the central area.
The displayed symbol can vary with the people detected.
Intervene actively by braking or making an evasive maneuver.

When animals are detected, an animal symbol is displayed. The symbol also shows the side of the road on which
the animal was detected. Intervene actively by braking or making an evasive maneuver.
Acute warning

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or making an evasive maneuver.
With animals no acute warning occurs.
Display in the Head-up Display

The warning is displayed simultaneously in the Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster. The displayed symbol can vary with the people detected.
When animals are detected, an animal symbol is displayed.
System limits
Basic limits
System operation is limited in situations such as the following:
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight curves.
▶ When the camera is dirty or the protective glass is damaged.
▶ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▶ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian and animal detection
In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians are detected as animals or animals as pedestrians.
Small animals are not detected by the object detection function, even if they are clearly visible in the image.
Limited detection:
▶ People or animals who are fully or partially covered, especially when their heads are covered.
▶ People who are not in an upright position, e.g., lying down.
▶ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., recumbent bicycles).
▶ After physical damage to the system, e.g., after an accident.
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. Depending on the country-specific version of the vehicle, the speed is between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. If the system is switched on below this speed, a message appears in the instrument cluster.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving situation.
The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Notes

Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation.
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steering wheel, as you may lose control of the vehicle.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

text_image
Car interior panel with six directional icons labeled in Chinese: 甲, 乙, 丙, 丁, 五, 家
Lane departure warning
Camera

natural_image
Top-down view of a car showing the rearview and front-quarter seats with a circular head indicator (no text or symbols)The camera is located near the base of the mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rear view mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off

Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
▶ Off: the LED goes out.
The state is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Display in the instrument cluster

▶ Lines: system is activated.
- Arrows: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued.
Display in the instrument display

▶ Symbol red: system is activated.
▶ Symbol green: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vibrating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
▶ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▶ When returning to your own lane.
When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
In the event of worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas.
When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.
In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
When the lane markings are covered by objects.
When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
▶ When driving toward bright lights.
When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept

flowchart
graph TD
A["Top Car"] --> B{Direction}
B --> C["Left Car"]
B --> D["Right Car"]
C --> E["Downward Arrow"]
D --> F["Downward Arrow"]
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehicles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the situations described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
Notes

Personal responsibility
The system does not serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehicle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

natural_image
Close-up of a car's backrest panel with six directional icons (arrow, up, down, down, right, and plus) pointing to the dashboard area.
Active Blind Spot Detection
Radar sensors

natural_image
Front view of a white car with BMW logo and side panel (no visible text or symbols)The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper.
Switching on/off

Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
▶ Off: the LED goes out.
The system can issue warnings at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Display

natural_image
Side view of a car's front mirror and side panel (no text or symbols visible)Information stage
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.
Warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own.
In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▶ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
- this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept

natural_image
Side-by-side comparison of a car's rear window and side profile, showing front and side views (no text or symbols)During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up.
During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition.
Active Protection
General information
The Active Protection safety package consists of systems that are independent of each other:
Attentiveness assistant.
PreCrash
PostCrash
Attentiveness assistant
The concept
The system can detect increasing lack of alertness or fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous journeys, for example, on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver take a break.
Note

Personal responsibility
The system cannot act as a substitute for the personal assessment of one's physical state and may not detect an increasing lack of alertness or fatigue or may not detect it correctly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be detected too late and an accident be caused as a result.
Function
The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system is trained about the driver, so that increasing lack of alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into account:
▶ Personal driving style, for example, steering behavior.
- Driving conditions, for example, length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommendation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approximately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following situations, for instance, and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▶ When the clock is set incorrectly.
When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▶ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering quickly.
In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently.
▶ When the road surface is poor.
In the event of strong side winds.
PreCrash
The concept
With this system critical driving situations that might result in an accident can be detected above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In these situations, preventative protection measures are automatically undertaken to minimize the risk in the event of an accident as much as possible.
Critical driving situations may include:
▶ Full brake applications.
▶ Severe understeering.
▶ Severe oversteering.
If the vehicle includes the collision warning or collision warning with braking feature, impending collisions with vehicles driving ahead or stopped in front of you can also be detected within the system's range.
Note

Personal responsibility
The system cannot possibly serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system may not always detect critical situations reliably and in a timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may result.
Function
After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts are automatically pretensioned once after the vehicle is driven is away.
In critical driving situations, the following individual functions become active as needed:
The front belts are automatically preten-sioned.
▶ Automatic closing of the windows.
▶ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats: automatic positioning of the backrest for the front passenger seat.
After a critical driving situation without an accident, the front belts are loosened again. All other systems can be restored to the desired setting.
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip.
PostCrash
In the event of an accident, the system can bring the car to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the vehicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also interrupts automatic braking.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.
The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the engine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. This then reduces braking distance to a minimum during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.
When equipped with Driving Assistant Plus or with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC is supported by the braking intervention if there is a possible risk of collision. To do this, the braking force is automatically increased if the braking pressure is insufficient when the brakes are applied.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with the Active Cruise Control, this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly when braking in critical situations.
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradients. The parking brake is not required.
- Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
- Release the foot brake and drive away without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driving without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The concept
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle conditions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes at individual wheels.

Adjust your driving style to the situation
An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.
Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive forces and brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC

Press and hold the button, but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC

Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum forward momentum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:
▶ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.
When rocking the vehicle or driving off in deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▶ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC

Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your vehicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably distributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that automatically controls vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients. Without applying the brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than walking speed.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed to approx. walking speed and then keeps its speed constant.
As long as there is active braking, the system is on standby. The system does not brake the vehicle during this time.
Use HDC in low gears or in transmission position D or R only.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed
Specify desired speed in the range from approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h using the rocker switch of the cruise control on the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be changed by lightly accelerating.

natural_image
Diagram of a vehicle interior with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)▶ Press up the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▶ Press up the rocker switch past the point of resistance: the speed increases while the rocker switch is pressed.
▶ Press down the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed decreases gradually.
▶ Press down the rocker switch past the point of resistance: when driving forward, the speed decreases to approx.
6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Activating HDC

natural_image
Interior view of a car's air conditioner unit with control buttons and indicator lights (no text or symbols visible)
Press the button; the LED above the button lights up.
Deactivating HDC

Press the button again and the LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated the approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Display in the instrument cluster

The selected speed is displayed in the speedometer.
▷ Green: the system is actively braking the vehicle.
▶ Orange: the system is on standby.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument cluster. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated brake temperatures.
Adaptive Drive
The concept
Adaptive Drive includes the following systems:
▷ Dynamic Drive, refer to page 120.
▷ Dynamic Damping Control, refer to page 120.
The system increases driving stability and driving comfort.
Dynamic Drive
The concept
Dynamic Drive reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
Driving stability and driving comfort are increased under all driving conditions. The system utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driving situations.
Programs
The system offers two different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 121.
SPORT
Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion when using a dynamic driving style or traveling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 121.
SPORT/SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock absorbers for greater driving agility.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced tuning between the COMFORT+ and SPORT/SPORT+ programs.
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers for optimal traveling comfort.
Integral Active Steering
The concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Active Steering and rear axle steering.
Active Steering varies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel movement as a function of the speed.
At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g., in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e., steering becomes more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneuverability by turning the rear wheels slightly in a direction opposite to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increasingly reduced.
The rear wheels are turned to the same angle as the front wheels.
In critical situations, Integral Active Steering can specifically steer the front and rear wheels to stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes, e.g., when braking where road conditions differ on the left and right sides of the vehicle.
Initializing
In rare cases, it may become necessary to initialize the Integral Active Steering.

The warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.
- With the engine running, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left and right several times in a uniform manner until the warning lamp disappears.
- Have the system checked if the warning lamp does not go out after moving the steering wheel approx. 6 times or if the steering wheel is at an angle.
Using snow chains
Note
When snow chains are in use, refer to page 202, rear wheel steering is deactivated.
Programs
The system offers several different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 121.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Active Steering for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Balanced tuning of the Integral Active Steering for optimal traveling comfort.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle responds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be deactivated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.
Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For this purpose various programs are available for selection that are activated via the two buttons of the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC OFF-button.
Operating the programs
Press the button Program

DSC OFF
TRACTION

SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
COMFORT+
ECO PRO
Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM-FORT in the following situations:
▶ Failure of Integral Active Steering.
▶ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF
Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

Press and hold the button, but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the tachometer.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC

Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is displayed in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF is activated.
TRACTION
Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.
Activating TRACTION

Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the tach-
ometer.
The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Deactivating TRACTION

Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC indicator
lamp go out.
Indicator/warning lamps
When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer.

The indicator lamp lights up: TRACTION is activated.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and adapted engine control with limited driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks.
Activating SPORT+

Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the tachometer
and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Automatic program change
When switching on the adjustable speed limit or activating cruise control, the program automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lamps
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension and engine control for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual specifications.
The configuration is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Activating SPORT

Press the button repeatedly until SPORT appears in the tachometer.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control Display, refer to page 124, the SPORT driving mode can be set.
After the SPORT driving mode is activated, select "Configure SPORT" on the displayed panel and configure the program.
SPORT can also be configured before it is activated:
- "Settings"
- "SPORT mode" or: "Driving mode"
- Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization.
Activating COMFORT

Press the button repeatedly until the program display in the tachometer
goes out.
In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 122.
COMFORT+
Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorbers and adapted engine control for optimal traveling comfort with maximum driving stabilization.
Activating COMFORT+

Press the button repeatedly until COMFORT+ appears in the tachome-
ter.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 180, provides consistent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for maximum range with maximum driving stabilization.
Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual specifications.
Activating ECO PRO

Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
- Activate ECO PRO.
- "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Configure driving mode
Settings can be made for the following driving modes in Driving mode:
▶ SPORT mode, refer to page 123.
▶ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 180.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program

The selected program is displayed in the tachometer.
Program selection

Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed briefly on the Control Display.
To do so, make the following settings:
- "Settings"
- "Control display"
"Driving mode" - "Driving mode info"
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC
The concept
This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear roads.
To the extent possible, the system automatically adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.
To maintain a certain distance, the system automatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to accelerate if operated accordingly.
Even if some time passes before the vehicle drives away again, the BMW can still be accelerated automatically and simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the desired speed.
The speed is also maintained on downhill gradients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient.
General information
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is also set to a driving style that saves on fuel consumption.
Notes

Personal responsibility
The system does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her speed, distance and driving style to the traffic conditions. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic events. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
| Press the button | Function |
![]() | Cruise control on/off, interrupting, refer to page 126 |
![]() | Store/maintain speed, refer to page 127 |
![]() | Resume speed, refer to page 128 |
![]() | Reduce distance, refer to page 128 |
![]() | Increase distance, refer to page 128 |
![]() | Adjust distance, refer to page 128 |
Press the button
Function

Rocker switch:
Change/maintain speed, refer to page 127

Congestion Assistant ON/OFF, Pause, refer to page 131
The arrangement of the buttons varies according to the how the vehicle is equipped or country-specific variants.
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle.

natural_image
Close-up of a car's front bumper with a black rectangular patch and an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detection of vehicles.
▶ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Remove layers of snow and ice carefully.
Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor.
Camera

natural_image
Top-down view of a car interior showing the rearview and side seats with a circular head indicator (no text or symbols)The camera is located near the base of the mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control
Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up and the marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Switching off

Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
If switching off the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Press the button on the steering wheel.
▶ If active: press twice.
▶ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted.
Interrupting

Press the button on the steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:
When the brakes are applied.
▶ When transmission position D is disengaged.
When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated.
When DSC is actively controlling stability.
If the safety belt and the driver's door are opened when the vehicle is standing still.
If the system has not detected objects for an extended period, e.g., on a road with very little traffic without road edge line markings.
▶ If the detection range of the radar is disrupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.
Maintaining/storing the speed

Press the button.
Or:

natural_image
Diagram of a vehicle interior with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)Press the rocker switch while the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page 129.
When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.
Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted to maintain and store the current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Speed differences
Large differences in speed relative to other vehicles cannot be compensated by the system for example in the following situations:
▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane.
When stationary objects are approached at speed.

natural_image
Mechanical component diagram showing a piston and cylinder with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear.
▶ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▶ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action.
Distance

Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traffic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.
Reduce distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 129, is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Increase distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
The selected distance, refer to page 129, is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Adjust distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Calling up the desired speed and distance
While driving

Press the button with the system switched on.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▶ When the system is switched off.
▶ When the ignition is switched off.
While standing

Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against rolling
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, engage position P of the automatic transmission and apply the parking brake. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.
The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill.
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the radar sensor moves off.
▶ Marking in the speedometer turns orange: no automatic driving away.
To accelerate to the desired speed automatically, press the accelerator briefly or press the RES or SET button.
Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection range has moved off.
Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle:

he button to call up a stored d speed.
-
Release the brake pedal.
-
Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES button or the rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed

natural_image
Close-up of a circular dial with the number 60, showing no text or symbols beyond the number.The marking lights up green: the system is active.
The marking lights up orange: the system has been interrupted.
The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

With instrument display: the symbol is displayed in the speedometer similarly to the mark for the desired speed.
Brief status display

Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system requirements for operation are currently not met.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown.
Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3
Distance display

Distance 4
This value is set after the system is switched on.

The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated because the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is deactivated because the accelerator is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.
Indicator/warning lamps

Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

The vehicle symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for operating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively assume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer to page 149.
System limits
Speed range
Best results are achieved when using the system on well-developed roads and highways. The desired speed can be selected between 20 mph/30 km/h to 110 mph/180 km/h.
The system can also be activated when stationary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every situation when using the system.
Detection range

natural_image
Top-down view of four cars driving on a road with a shaded lane (no text or symbols visible)The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection capacity of the camera and the sensor, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate for:
▶ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road users.
▶ Red traffic lights.
▶ Cross traffic.
Oncoming traffic.
Swerving vehicles

natural_image
Top-down diagram of two cars driving on a road with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. This also applies to major speed differences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.
Cornering

natural_image
Top-down view of three cars driving on a curved road with dashed lane markings (no text or symbols)If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance.
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a considerable delay.

natural_image
Top-down view of three cars driving on curved road markings (no text or symbols)When approaching a curve, the system may react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or behind bumps in the road.
Radar sensor
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
OAYARS3-A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
- This device may not cause harmful interference, and - this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails.
The function for detecting and responding when approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in the following situation:
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.
▶ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A Check Control message is displayed.
Congestion Assistant
The concept
In congestion situations, the system controls the speed, steers independently and keeps the vehicle in the lane.
To the extent possible, the system automatically adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system automatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster.
When lane markings are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the lane. For this purpose, the system steers independently as needed, for example, during cornering.
General information
The congestion assistant determines speed and distance from the vehicle in front via a radar sensor and the position of the lane marking via a camera.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether the steering wheel is being touched.
The system is deactivated as soon as contact with the steering wheel is no longer detected.
In order to be able to use the Congestion Assistant, place your hands around the steering wheel.
When driving with gloves or with protective covers, contact with the steering wheel cannot be detected by the sensors. The system in this case cannot be used.
Notes

Personal responsibility
The system does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her speed, distance and driving style to the traffic conditions. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic events. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.
Functional requirements
▶ Drive on approved road type. The data on this are stored in the navigation system.
- Driving on the limited access highway or divided lane roads.
▶ Sufficient lane width.
▶ Lane marking is detected.
▶ Vehicle driving ahead is detected.
▶ Speed below 25 mph/40 km/h.
Both hands on the steering wheel rim.
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
| Press the button | Function |
![]() | Congestion Assistant ON/OFF, Pause, refer to page 133. |
![]() | Rocker switch: Store, change/maintain speed, refer to page 127. |
![]() | Maintain, store speed, refer to page 127. |
![]() | Resume speed, refer to page 128. |
![]() | Adjust distance, refer to page 128. |
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle.

natural_image
Close-up of a car's front bumper with a black rectangular patch and an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detection of vehicles.
▶ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Remove layers of snow and ice carefully.
Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor.
Camera

natural_image
Top-down view of a car's rearview showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)The camera is located near the base of the mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off and pausing
Switching on

Press the button.
▶ Prepare system: press once.
▶ Activate system:
The system is automatically activated below 25 mph/40 km/h.
If the ACC is not activated: press wiper.
With ACC activated: system is ready.

If ACC is not activated: indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on.

If ACC is not activated: indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on.
Congestion Assistant can be used.
With Congestion Assistant switched on, the Pedestrian Warning system is active.
Switching off

Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth-
erwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Press the button.
The indicator goes out. Stored desired speed and distance are still kept by the ACC.
The system no longer steers independently.
Interrupting

When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:
At a speed above 25 mph/40 km/h.
▶ With only one detected lane marking.
When you leave the limited access highway.
▶ When you leave the divided lane road.
▶ When the steering wheel is released.
▶ When steering intervention is active.
▷ When you leave your own lane.
▶ With incorrect vehicle ahead.
When the turn signal is on.

Red flashing and signal tone:
Congestion Assistant is interrupted.
The system no longer steers independently. ACC exercises control.
If the system conditions are met, the system reactivates automatically.
Distance

Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traffic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.
Adjust distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown.
Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4
This value is set after the system is switched on.

Selecting a distance
Adjust the distance according to the traf-
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Symbol Description

Congestion Assistant and Distance Control on standby.

Congestion Assistant on standby. Distance control controls within the set distance.

Congestion Assistant activated. The system controls the speed and assists with maintaining the lane.
Symbol Description

Rolling bars: at least one functional requirement is no longer satisfied. The system soon deactivates the automatic steering. ACC on standby.

Red flashing and signal tone: congestion Assistant is interrupted. The system does not steer independently. ACC exercises control.
System limits
When driving within narrow driving lanes, e.g., in construction zones or rescue lanes, the system cannot be activated or meaningfully used.

Limited detection capacity
Because of the limits to the detection capacity of the camera and the sensor, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Complying with country-specific laws
When the Congestion Assistant is used, observe specific national laws.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking action is insufficient.

Unfavorable conditions
Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a constant speed, for instance:
On curvy roads.
In heavy traffic.
On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
General information
When ECO PRO is activated, cruise control is also set to a driving style that saves on fuel consumption.
Controls
At a glance
| Press the button | Function |
![]() | Cruise control on/off, interrupting, refer to page 135 |
![]() | Store/maintain speed, refer to page 135 |
![]() | Resume speed, refer to page 136 |
![]() | Rocker switch:Change/maintain speed, refer to page 136 |
The arrangement of the buttons varies according to the how the vehicle is equipped or country-specific variants.
Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed.
The cruise control can be used.
Switching off

Deactivated or interrupted system
If the system is deactivated or interrupted, actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Press the button on the steering wheel.
▶ If active: press twice.
▶ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.
Interrupting

When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
The brakes are applied.
The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ HDC is activated.
Maintaining/storing the current speed

Press the button.
Or:

natural_image
Close-up of a car's front side panel with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)Press the rocker switch while the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 136.
When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.
Changing/maintaining speed
The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted in order to maintain and store the current speed.

Adapting the desired speed
Adapt the desired speed to the road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

natural_image
Mechanical component diagram showing a piston-like structure with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear.
▶ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▶ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Max. adjustable speed: 140 mph/230 km/h.
▶ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it there accelerates or decelerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed
RES
Press the button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster indicates whether the system is switched on.
Desired speed

The marking lights up green: the system is active.
The marking lights up orange: the system has been interrupted.
The marking does not light up: the system is switched off.

With instrument display: the symbol is displayed in the speedometer similarly to the mark for the desired speed.
Brief status display

Selected desired speed.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system requirements for operation are currently not met.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of or behind your vehicle are indicated by:
▶ Signal tones.
▶ Visual display.
General information
Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors in the bumpers.
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
By the front sensors and the two rear corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Notes

Check the traffic situation as well
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.

Avoid driving quickly with PDC
Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active.
For technical reasons, the system may otherwise be too late in issuing a warning.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with control panels and a circular vent (no text or symbols visible)
PDC Park Distance Control
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine running.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually

Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
▶ Off: the LED goes out.
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the rearview camera, refer to page 139, can be switched on.
Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object becomes, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds:
▶ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that is detected by only one of the corner sensors.
▶ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an object by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▶ When transmission position P is engaged.
Volume
The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted, refer to user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the colors red, green and yellow.
If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to PDC:
-
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display.
-
Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
System limits
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g.:
▶ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▶ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▶ With low objects.
▶ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▶ When sensors are very dirty or covered in ice.
▶ When sensors are covered in snow.
On rough road surfaces.
In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
In heavy exhaust.
Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
To ensure full operability:
Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View comprises various camera assistance systems that help the driver when parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections.
▶ Rearview camera, refer to page 139
▶ Side View, refer to page 143.
▶ Top View, refer to page 141.
Backup camera
The concept
The backup camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
Hints

Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects lo-
cated outside the picture area of the backup camera.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with control panels and a rotary knob (no text or symbols visible)
Rearview camera
Camera

natural_image
Close-up of a car's rear window with a circular eye-like opening and an arrow pointing to the lens (no text or symbols visible)The camera lens is located under the BMW emblem of the trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. The camera calibrates itself regularly after the system has been switched off. This is why the emblem on the tailgate remains open after the system has been deactivated and while driving. The emblem closes automatically as soon as calibration is complete.
Clean the lens, refer to page 224.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine running.
The backup camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually

Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
▶ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
The rearview camera is switched on.
The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.
▶ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.
▶ Obstacle marking
P_G "Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines

natural_image
Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)- Can be shown in the rearview camera image when in transmission position R.
▶ Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.
Are dependent on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines

natural_image
Exterior view of a road with intersecting curved lines forming an X shape (no text or symbols)- Can be shown in the rearview camera image.
▶ Show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road.
▶ Only one turning circle line is displayed when the steering wheel is turned.
Obstacle marking
General information

natural_image
3D rendering of a curved surface with a triangular base and vertical rod, no text or symbols visible▶ Spatially-shaped markings can be shown in the rearview camera image.
Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown.
Parking using pathway and turning circle lines
- Position the vehicle so that the turning circle lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

natural_image
Top-down view of a geometric structural element resembling a truss or truss, with no visible text or symbols.- Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

natural_image
Abstract geometric pattern with curved and straight lines forming a grid-like structure (no text or symbols)Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
-
Select the symbol.
-
Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
-
Select the symbol.
-
Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the rearview camera.
Top View
The concept
Top View assists you in parking and maneuvering. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose.
General information
The image is captured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the backup camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early.
Notes

Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the cameras.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with control panels and a circular vent (no visible text or symbols)
Top View
Cameras

natural_image
Close-up of a car's side mirror and dashboard, showing the wheel rim and frame (no text or symbols visible)The lenses of the Top View cameras are located at the bottom of the exterior mirror housings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 224.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Select transmission position R with the engine running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually

Press the button.
On: the LED lights up.
▶ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.
Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive
With Top View switched on:
R "Rear view camera"
The backup camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Display
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display.

natural_image
Top-down view of a car parked in a parking lot with lane markings (no text or symbols visible)The display appears as soon as Top View is activated.
If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display when reverse gear is selected. To switch to Top View:
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
-
☀️ Select the symbol.
-
Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
-
Select the symbol.
-
Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines
The static, red turning circle line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way.
The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space actually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The pathway line is dependent on the current steering angle and is continuously adjusted with the steering wheel movement.
P "Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following situations:
▶ With a door open.
▶ With the trunk lid open.
▶ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
A Check Control message is displayed in some of these situations.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected relatively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehicle record the traffic situation on each side.
Notes
The images from both cameras are shown simultaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as well
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the Side View cameras.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with control panels and a circular vent (no visible text or symbols)
Side View
Cameras

natural_image
Side view of a car with a tire and arrow pointing to a small black dot on the wheel (no text or symbols visible)Two cameras integrated in the bumpers capture the image.
The two camera lenses are located on the sides of the bumper.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 224.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually

Press the button.
Automatic deactivation during forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Display
The traffic area to the left and right is displayed on the Control Display.

natural_image
Two cars standing at a crossroads with a central display showing a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)Guidelines at the bottom of the image show the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
-
"Brightness"
-
Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
-
"Contrast"
-
Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m.
Parking assistant
The concept

natural_image
Top-down diagram of a multi-lane road with cars and a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.
When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information issued by the PDC and the parking assistant and react accordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 137.
Hints

Personal responsibility
The parking assistant does not relieve the driver of responsibility for the vehicle during the parking procedure.
Watch the parking space and parking procedure closely and intervene if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.

Changes to the parking space
Changes to the parking space after it was measured are not taken into account by the system.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Transporting loads
Loads that extend beyond the perimeter of the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Curbs
The parking assistant may steer the vehicle over or onto curbs.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehicle may become damaged.
An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automatically when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▶ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▶ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▶ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▶ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
▶ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking procedure
▶ Closed doors.
▶ Parking brake released.
At a glance
Button in the vehicle

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with control panels and a rotary dial (no text or symbols visible)
Parking assistant
Ultrasound sensors

natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel with a white arrow pointing to a small black object on the rear wheel (no text or symbols visible)The ultrasound sensors used to measure parking spaces are located in the side turn signals.
To ensure full operability:
Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button

Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press the button.

▷ Switch off the ignition.
Display on the Control Display
Activating/deactivating the system
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated.
P The system is activated.
Without Professional navigation system or TV: system status

natural_image
Top-down view of a car with directional arrows indicating movement or navigation (no text or symbols)The status is displayed with symbols.

Gray: parking space search. Blue: the system is activated. A suitable parking space was found.

The parking procedure is active. Steering control has been seized.
Status of the parking space search

text_image
1 2▶ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search.
▶ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable.
The vehicle is parked in the parking space if the parking procedure is active.
▶ No display: no parking space search.
With navigation system professional or TV: status of the system

natural_image
Top-down view of a car with two white arrows pointing downward to the roof, indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols present)Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle representation. Parking assistant is activated and search for parking space active.
▶ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the road as on the Control Display. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.
The parking procedure is active. Steering control has been seized.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forwards slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant

Check the traffic situation as well
Loud sounds outside and within the vehicle can drown out the signal tones of the parking assistant and PDC.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.
- Switch on the parking assistant and activate it if necessary.
The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.
- Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
To achieve the best possible parking position, wait for the automatic steering wheel movement after the gear change when the vehicle is stationary.
The end of the parking procedure is indicated on the Control Display.
- Adjust the parking position yourself if necessary.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:
▶ "Barking Assistant" Select the symbol on the Control Display.
▶ Press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:
▶ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering.
▶ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the Control Display.
▶ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite direction to the desired side for parking.
▶ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.
On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces if necessary.
▶ If doors are open.
When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly arise.
▶ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Continuing
An interrupted parking procedure can be continued if necessary.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this.
System limits
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations:
In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:
▶ When sensors are dirty or iced over.
▶ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.
On slippery ground.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▶ When leaves or snow has collected in the parking space.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances:
▶ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
▶ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▶ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
▶ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▶ With objects with a fine surface structure, such as fences.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected.
The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.
Head-up Display
The concept

natural_image
Close-up of a car's front wheel and roof structure (no text or symbols visible)This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. In this way, the driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by:
▶ Certain sitting positions.
▶ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▶ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▶ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, check the basic settings.
Switching on/off

natural_image
Interior view of a car's backrest with six directional icons on the front panel (no text or symbols)
Press the button.
Display
Overview
▶ Speed.
▶ Navigation system.
▶ Check Control messages.
▶ Collision warning.
▶ Speed limit detection.
▶ Cruise control.
Distance information.
▶ Congestion Assistant.
▶ Pedestrian warning.
Selection list from the instrument cluster.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up Display
- "Settings"
- "Head-Up Display"
- "Displayed information"
- Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
- "Settings"
- "Head-Up Display"
- "Brightness"
- Turn the controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be additionally influenced using the instrument lighting.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Adjusting the height
- "Settings"
- "Head-Up Display"
- "Height"
- Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Setting the rotation
- "Settings"
- "Head-Up Display"
- "Rotation"
- Turn the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images from being displayed.
Therefore, have the special windshield replaced by a service center only.
Distance information
The concept
The system displays a symbol in the Head-up Display to indicate that the distance behind the vehicle in front is not sufficient.
General information
The distance is determined by the radar sensor of the Active Cruise Control.
Hints

Personal responsibility
The display does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her distance and driving style to the traffic conditions. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.
At a glance
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle.

natural_image
Close-up of a car's front bumper with a black rectangular patch and an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the detection of vehicles.
▶ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Remove layers of snow and ice carefully.
Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor.
Switching on
- Switching on Head-Up Display, refer to page 149.
- "Distance info": Select the indication in the Head-Up Display, refer to page 149.
Display in the Head-up Display

The symbol is displayed when the distance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short.
Functional requirements
▶ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▶ Display in the Head-up Display selected.
▶ Distance too short for longer than about 2 seconds.
▶ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails.
Climate control
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip-
ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Automatic climate control

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 AUTO OFF MAX A/C OFF AUTO SYNC A/C M 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 121 Air distribution, left
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program, left
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat
5 Remove ice and condensation
6 Maximum cooling
7 Display
8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right
9 AUTO program, right
10 Temperature, right
11 Air distribution, right
12 Seat heating, right 47
13 Active seat ventilation, right 48
14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode
15 Cooling function
16 Rear window defroster
17 SYNC program
18 Active seat ventilation, left 48
19 Seat heating, left 47
Climate control functions in detail
Manual air distribution

Press the button repeatedly to select a program:
▶ Upper body region.
▶ Upper body region and footwell.
▶ Footwell.
▶ Windows and footwell.
▶ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▶ Windows: driver's side only.
▶ Windows and upper body region.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the condensation sensor.
Temperature

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different temperature settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.
AUTO program

Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and temperature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, the AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function, refer to page 154, is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.
At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air flow and air distribution can be adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase the intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.
Air flow, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Press the button.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.
The air volume can be adjusted when the program is active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Maximum cooling

Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and air circulation mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▶ At an external temperature of approx. 32 °F/0 °C.
▶ When the engine is running.
The air volume can be adjusted when the program is active.
Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:
▶ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▶ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff automatically.
Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.

Continuous recirculated-air mode
The recirculated-air mode should not be used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.
Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified and – depending on the temperature setting – warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 176, develops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Rear window defroster

Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.
SYNC program

The current settings on the driver's side for temperature, air flow, air distribution, and AUTO program are transferred to the front passenger side and to the left and right rear.
The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side or in the rear are changed.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior.
Functional requirement
▶ Up to 20 minutes after the engine has been switched off.
▷ Warm engine.
The battery is sufficiently charged.
▶ External temperature below 77 °F/25 °C.
Switching on
-
Switch off the ignition.
-
Press the right side of the button on the driver's side.
The symbol appears on the automatic climate Control Display.
The interior temperature, air volume and air distribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on.
Switching off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side.
The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
▶ Complete system:

Press and hold the left button on the driver's side until the control f.
On the front passenger side:

Press and hold the left button on the front passenger side.
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ SYNC program.
▶ Rear window defroster.
▶ Left side of Air volume button.
▶ Seat heating.
▶ Seat ventilation.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle.
This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 208, of your vehicle.
Rear automatic climate control
At a glance

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 AUTO CAT MAX AVG 7 71 Temperature
2 AUTO program
3 Vent settings
4 Air volume, AUTO intensity
5 Display
6 Maximum cooling
7 Seat heating 48
Switching the rear automatic climate control on/off
-
"Settings"
-
"Climate"
-
"Rear climate control"
The rear automatic climate control is not operational if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting or defogging the windows is active.
AUTO program

Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution, and temperature are controlled automatically:
Depending on the selected temperature, the AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is directed to the upper body and into the foot-well.
The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted.

Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase the inten-
The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.
Temperature

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.
Manual air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted to individual needs.

Press the button repeatedly to select a program:
▶ Upper body region.
▶ Upper body region and footwell.
▶ Footwell.
Air volume, manual
To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left or right side of the button: decrease or increase air volume.
The selected air volume is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off

Press and hold the left button.
Switching on
Press any button except:
▶ Left side of Air volume button.
▶ Seat heating.
Maximum cooling

Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and air circulation mode.
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
At an external temperature of approx. 32 °F/0 °C.
▷ When the engine is running.
Ventilation
Front ventilation

text_image
2 2 3 1 1 3▶ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, arrow 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▶ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 2.
▶ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 3.
Ventilation levels
Draft-free ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level ≈ the air current is fanned out.
▶ Maximum air volume:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level ≈ the air is partially fanned out and partially bundled. This maximizes the air supply.
▶ Direct ventilation:
Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level → the air is bundled and can be directed to a specific point.
Adjusting the ventilation
▶ Ventilation for cooling:
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your direction, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.
Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in rear, center

text_image
2 3 2 1 1▶ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, arrow 1.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▶ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 2.
▶ Thumbwheels for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation/heating
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.
The parked-car heating warms the vehicle interior, making snow and ice easier to remove. With the ignition switched off, the air is automatically routed to the windshield, to the side windows, and into the footwell.
The systems can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset departure times.
The switch-on time is automatically determined based on the temperature. The systems promptly switch on before the selected departure time.
Operation takes place on the iDrive or the remote control.
Note

Parked-car heating in enclosed areas
Do not operate the parked-car heating in enclosed areas, as breathing of the harmful exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas. Switch off the parked-car heating when refueling.
At external temperatures below 32 ^/0 ^ , water vapor occurs that emerges from below the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Parked-car ventilation
With remote control or when the departure time is preselected: depends on internal, external and set temperature.
▶ Direct operation via iDrive: any external temperature.
In direct mode via remote control: external temperature above approx. 59 °F/15 °C.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Parked-car heating
▶ With remote control or when the departure time is preselected: depends on internal, external and set temperature.
▶ Direct operation via iDrive: any external temperature.
In direct mode via remote control: external temperature below approx. 59 °F/15 °C.
The battery is sufficiently charged.
The fuel tank is filled to above the reserve range.
If the parked-car heating has not been used for several months, it may be necessary to switch the system on again after several minutes.
Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
- "Climate"
- "Activate ind. heating" or "Activate comf. ventilation"

text_image
Climate Seat heating distribution Seat heating rear □ Rear climate control □ Activate parked-car vent. □ Activate timer 1 Timer 1: □ Activate timer 2The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time after being switched off.
Preselecting the departure time
- "Settings"
- "Climate"
- "Dep. time 1:" or "Dep. time 2:"
- Set the desired time.
Activating the departure time
- "Settings"
- "Climate"
- "Activate depart. time 1" or "Activate depart. time 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the departure time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to react- vated.
Remote control
At a glance

text_image
I/O START STOP 1 2 3 41 LED: transmission confirmation
2 Switching on/off
3 Activate parked-car ventilation/heating
4 Deactivate parked-car ventilation/heating
Remote control range
The reception-dependent average range is approx. 490 ft/150 m.
The range is best when the remote control is held upright and as high as possible.
Switching on/off directly

-
The button until the green LED lights up.
-
Within approx. the next 5 seconds, press the desired button until the green or red LED lights up:

Switching on

Switching off
Correct transmission to the system is confirmed for approx. 2 seconds by rapid flashing of the green LED.
If there is a transmission error, the red LED lights up for approx. 2 seconds.
The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes.
Frequencies
The remote control may not function properly if it experiences local interference from other systems or devices that use the same frequency.
Replacing the batteries
Replace the battery if a Check Control message is displayed or if the LED either no longer lights up or flashes when the remote control is activated.

No rechargeable batteries
Do not use rechargeable batteries, as damage may result from the substances in the batteries.

text_image
Diagram of a car door handle with numbered arrows indicating parts of the lid and seat.- Use a suitable object to unclip the battery compartment, arrow 1.
- Remove the cover of the battery compartment; see arrow 2.
- Insert batteries of the same type.
- Press the cover closed.

Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.
New remote control
A new remote control can be put into operation as a second device or if the original one was lost; it can be initialized by your service center if needed.
Two remote control devices can be used with the vehicle.
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote control
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control.

During programming
During programming and before activating a device using the integrated universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.
Compatibility

If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the integrated universal remote control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▶ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror

text_image
1 2 3▷ LED, arrow 1.
▶ Buttons, arrow 2.
The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is required for programming.
Programming
General information
- Switch on the ignition.
- Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.
- Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.
- Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be programmed on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will begin flashing slowly.
- Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.
- To program other functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior rearview mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-code wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternating-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear-
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will repeat for approximately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code system, the integrated universal remote control and the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the operating manual of the system being set up for information on how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.
To synchronize:
- Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled system.
- Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described.
- Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
- Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this work step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
- Switch on the ignition.
- Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed.
-
As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.
-
Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.
-
Release both buttons as soon as the interior rearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Controls

Before operation
Before operating a system using the integrated universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remote-controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear-view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rear-view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Front: open

natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a white arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)Press the button.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter

Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Danger of burns
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.

Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.
Rear: open

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the side door and window, with a white arrow pointing to the interior (no text or symbols visible)Press on the cover.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Connecting electrical devices
Hints

Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.

Replace the cover after use
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.
Center console

natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a black button and directional arrow (no text or symbols)Press the button.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the front passenger footwell

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a white arrow pointing to the backrest area (no text or symbols visible)Socket is located below the glove compartment.
To access the socket: fold open the cover.
Center armrest

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a black dot on the intake area and an arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)Remove the cover.
Through-loading system
The concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40.
The sides can be folded down separately or together.
Hints

Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat backrests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. Ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, injury or damage may result.

Lock the rear seat backrests in position
Before mounting child restraint fixing systems, place the seat backrest as far as possible at an angle at which the child seat is resting firmly against the backrest and all backrests can be locked securely in place.
Otherwise, the child seat will not be as stable as it should be, and there is increased danger of injury due to unexpected movement of the seat backrest.

Preventing indentations
When folding down the rear seats, ensure that the safety belt buckles are located in the recesses provided form them in the seat. Otherwise they can create indentations in the backrest.
Opening
-
Unlock the belt lock of the center safety belt in the rear using the latch plate of another safety belt.
-
Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt into the specially designated fixture on the rear window shelf.

natural_image
Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle being lifted by an arrow, showing no text or symbols- Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to release the rear seat backrest.

natural_image
Top-down view of a car trunk with visible structural components and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)- The unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward slightly.

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and side seats, with no visible text or symbols.- Fold backrest forward.
Closing
- Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it.

Ensure that the lock is securely engaged
Make sure that the lock engages properly when folding back, otherwise transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occupants.
- Release the belt tongue from the fixture on the rear window shelf.
- Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage.
To secure cargo, refer to page 178, with nets or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with lashing eyes.
Ski bag
Capacity
The ski bag can be used to transport up to four pairs of skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m or, depending on the binding, up to two snowboards with a length of up to 5 ft/1.60 m.
Preparing and loading the ski bag
- Fold open the center armrest on the inside.
- Open the inside cover and cargo area by pressing the button.

natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt seat with no visible text or symbols- Lay out the ski bag.
-
Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the sharp edges of the skis.
-
Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle.

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle seatbelt with a black bandage and white stripe, showing no text or symbols- Tighten the retaining strap.

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle seatbelt with a black bandage and upward arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)
Securing the ski bag
Secure the ski bag by tightening the retaining strap; otherwise, the contents could present a source of danger to the passengers, for example during braking or evasive maneuvers.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be removed entirely, e.g., to dry quickly or to use other inserts.

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a laptop inside a seatbelt with an upward arrow symbol (no text or labels)- Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bag out.
- Close the cover in the cargo area.
More information on the various inserts available can be obtained from your service center.
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Notes

No loose objects in the passenger compartment
Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers.

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dashboard.
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are available in the vehicle interior:
▶ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 167.
Storage compartment in the front center armrest, refer to page 168.
Storage compartment in the rear center armrest, refer to page 169.
▶ Compartments in the doors.
▶ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
Net in the front passenger footwell.
Glove compartment
Note

Close the glove compartment again immediately
Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.
Opening

natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel showing a white arrow pointing to a slot, no text or symbols visible.Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
USB interface for data transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.:
▶ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 31.
▶ Music collection, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication.
Without Professional navigation system or TV: at a glance

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard showing the intake manifold and control panel (no text or symbols visible)The USB interface is located in the center arm-rest.
Without Professional navigation system or TV: at a glance

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the front and rear compartments with an arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)The USB interface is located in the glove compartment.
Notes
Observe the following when connecting:
Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.
Do not connect USB hard drives.
Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.
Front center armrest
Opening
A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the front seats.

natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)Press the buttons next to the lock.
Locking the storage compartment

natural_image
Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle component in the lower side of a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)The storage compartment in the armrest can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid, refer to page 37, for example.
After the storage compartment is locked, the remote control can be handed out without the integrated key, refer to page 30, for instance at a hotel.
This prevents access to the storage compartment and to the cargo area.
Connection for an external audio device

Description, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication.
Rear center armrest
The center armrest contains a storage compartment.
Folding down

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle cabin with seats and a highlighted door (no text or symbols visible)Pull on the opener and fold the armrest forward.
Opening

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle showing a car seat with an open trunk and a white upward arrow (no text or symbols)Pull on the handle and fold open the cover.
Clothes hooks
Two folding clothes hooks are provided in the rear of the vehicle. To unfold them, press on the top edge of the clothes hooks.

Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's vision.

No heavy objects
Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive maneuvers.
Cupholders
Notes

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.

Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable containers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.
Center console

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a black play button and white downward arrow (no text or symbols)To open: press on the cover.
In the rear
In the center armrest.

natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with a downward arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)The cupholder can be adjusted for three different container sizes.
To open: press the button.
To reduce in size: fold closed to the desired position.
To close: fold all the way closed. The cupholder must be closed before it can be opened fully.
Storage compartments in the cargo area
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the rear cargo area trim.
Lashing eyes
To secure the cargo, refer to page 178, there are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Storage compartment under the cargo floor cover

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle showing a black panel with white arrows pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)Raise the cargo floor cover using the strap.
Left storage compartment

natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel showing a highlighted component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)Compartment for small items and first aid kit, refer to page 217.

text_image
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 877 - VI/13Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.
Engine and differential
Always obey the official speed limit.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:
For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking-in period.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the trunk lid
Drive with the trunk lid closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; otherwise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road users may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the passenger compartment.
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:
▶ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▶ Greatly increase the blower speed.
▶ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle po-
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal injury as well as property damage.
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Climate control windshield

natural_image
Top-down view of a car showing the rearview and side seats with an upward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)The marked area is not covered with heat reflective coating.
Use this area for garage door openers, devices for electronic toll collection, etc.
Climate control laminated tinted safety glass
The vehicle glass provides full protection against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the skin.
Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle
It is advised that you do not use mobile communication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the vehicle without connecting them directly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.
Driving through water
Drive though calm water only and only if it is not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.

Adhere to water depth and speed limitations
Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is necessary.
The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the area around the pedals

No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet coated with road salt or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users.
The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, resulting in a reduction in the brake system efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary.

Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

Do not drive in neutral
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist is unavailable with the engine stopped.
Brake disc corrosion
The corrosion on the brake discs and the contamination on the brake pads are furthered by:
▶ Low mileage.
▶ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.
▶ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that generally cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Traces of water under the vehicle like this are normal.
Loading
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Hints

Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carrying capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.

No fluids in the trunk
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.
Determining the load limit

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the side panel and seat area (no text or symbols visible)- Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard:
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations may result.
-
Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
-
Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.
-
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
- Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Load

text_image
+ ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. LoadThe maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▶ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
▶ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.
▶ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▶ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area

natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with two directional arrows pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Securing cargo
▶ Smaller and lighter items: secure with retaining straps or with a cargo net or draw straps.
▶ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Securing cargo
Always position and secure the cargo as described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occupants.
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emissions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts following use
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption values in various ways, for instance fuel consumption can be influenced by the size of the tires.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running constantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine.
Using this system can cause certain components of the vehicle to become worn prematurely.
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
Switch off any functions that are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.
Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your service center.
Please also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer to page 208.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort functions, e.g. the climate control output, are adjusted.
The extension of the range that is achieved as a result can be displayed in the instrument cluster.
At a glance
The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
▶ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 181.
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to page 182
▶ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 181.
Activating ECO PRO

Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
- Activate ECO PRO.
- "Configure ECO PRO"
- Configure the program.
Via the iDrive
- "Settings"
- "ECO PRO mode"
Or
- "Settings"
- "Driving mode"
- "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip
▷ "Tip at:",
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO Tip is to be displayed.
▶ "ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO speed is exceeded.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set temperature, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel consumption can be economized.
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior mirror heating are also reduced.
The exterior mirror heating is made available when outside temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO potential
The percentage of potential savings that can be achieved with the current configuration is displayed.
Display in the instrument cluster
Display in the instrument display
When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display switches to a special configuration.
Some of the displays may differ from the display in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO bonus range

An extension of the range can be achieved by an adjusted driving style.
This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.
Driving style

text_image
D ECO PRO CHARGE POWER 1 2In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display indicates the current efficiency of the driving style.
Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display when accelerating.
The efficiency of the driving style is shown by the color of the bar:
▶ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the blue range.
▶ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are met.
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction

The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance.
Note
The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
- "Settings"
- "Info display"
- "ECO PRO Info"
In the instrument display: - "Settings"
- "Info display"
- "Driving mode view"
ECO PRO tip - Symbols
An additional symbol and a text instruction are displayed.
Symbol Measure

For efficient driving style, back off the accelerator or delay accelerating to allow time to assess road conditions.

Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed.

Automatic transmission: switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions.
Indications on the Control Display
EfficientDynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technology can be displayed during driving.
- "Vehicle Info"
- "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be displayed within an adjustable time frame.
Vertical bars show consumption for the selected time frame.
Trip interruptions are represented below the bar on the time axis.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history time frame
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
- Open "Options".
- "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
工 "EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
▶ Automatic engine start-stop function.
▶ Energy recovery.
▶ Climate control output.
▶ Coasting.
Display ECO PRO tips
i "ECO PRO Tips"
The setting is stored for the profile currently in use.
Coasting
The concept
The system helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission when transmission position D is engaged. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmission position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed, the engine is automatically coupled to the transmission again.
Hints
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, refer to page 180, driving mode.
The function is available in a certain speed range.
A forward-looking driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and supports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Safety mode
The function is not available if one of the following conditions is satisfied.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
- Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▶ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing excessive current.
▶ Cruise control activated.
Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, approx. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are satisfied:
▶ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.
The selector lever is in transmission position D.
▶ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster

The mark in the bar display below the tachometer is backlit in blue and is located at the zero point. The tachometer approximately indicates idle speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode is active.

text_image
EfficientDynamics 2Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
- "Vehicle Info"
- "EfficientDynamics"
- "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the system manually
The function can be deactivated in the Configure ECO PRO, refer to page 180, menu, e.g., to
use the braking effect of the engine when traveling downhill.
The setting is stored for the profile currently in use.

natural_image
Close-up of a metallic tool tip dispensing liquid into a circular opening, with blurred background elements (no text or symbols visible)Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following.
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
General information

Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.
Fuel cap
Opening
- Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap.

natural_image
Black square button with white arrow symbol pointing left, no text or numbers present- Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

natural_image
Diagram of a mechanical component with internal parts and directional arrows (no text or symbols)- Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a cylindrical part (no visible text or symbols)Closing
-
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
-
Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
In the event of an electrical malfunction, for example.
- Remove the cover.

natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with an upward arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)- Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

natural_image
Close-up of a car door handle with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)Observe the following when refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may escape, causing harm to the environment and damaging the vehicle.

Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the gas station.
Fuel
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Fuel recommendation
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives.
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gasoline with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other components.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards:
US: ASTM 4806-xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system.
Gasoline quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel grade
Do not use any gasoline below the minimum fuel grade as this may impair engine performance.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Fuel quality
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled maintenance.
BMW recommends BP fuels

Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following:
The service life of the tires.
Road safety.
▶ Driving comfort.
Checking the pressure
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
▶ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▶ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 192, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. Pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following:
▶ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▶ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 192, and adjust as necessary.

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing leather seats and a door with a black opening (no text or symbols visible)These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Maximum permissible speed
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; otherwise, tire damage and accidents may result.
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
640i Gran Coupe
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires | ![]() | |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC | 2.3 / 33 | 2.5 / 36 |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC | ||
| 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC | 2.3 / 33 | 2.6 / 38 |
| Front: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC | 2.3 / 33 | - |
| - | 2.3 / 33 | |
| Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC | ||
| Front: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC | 2.3 / 33 | - |
| - | 2.5 / 36 | |
| Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC | ||
| Front: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC | 2.5 / 36 | - |
| - | 2.8 / 41 | |
| Rear: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC | ||
| Compact wheel: T 135/90 R 17 104 M | Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h | |
| 4.2 / 60 | ||
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires | ![]() |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC | 2.3 / 33 2.5 / 36 |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC | |
| 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC | 2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38 |
| Front: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC | 2.3 / 33 - 2.3 / 33 |
| Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC | |
| Front: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC | 2.3 / 33 - 2.5 / 36 |
| Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC | |
| Front: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC | 2.5 / 36 - 2.8 / 41 |
| Rear: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC | |
| Compact wheel: T 135/90 R 17 104 M | Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 |
650i Gran Coupe
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires | ![]() | |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC | 2.5 / 36 | 2.5 / 36 |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC | ||
| 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC | 2.5 / 36 | 2.6 / 38 |
| Front: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC | 2.5 / 36 | - |
| - | 2.5 / 36 | |
| Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC | ||
| Front: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC | 2.5 / 36 | - |
| - | 2.5 / 36 | |
| Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC | ||
| Front: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC | 2.7 / 39 | - |
| - | 2.9 / 42 | |
| Rear: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC | ||
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires | ![]() | |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC | 2.5 / 36 | 2.5 / 36 |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC | ||
| 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC | 2.5 / 36 | 2.6 / 38 |
| Front: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC | 2.5 / 36 | - |
| - | 2.5 / 36 | |
| Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC | ||
| Front: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC | 2.5 / 36 | - |
| - | 2.5 / 36 | |
| Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC | ||
| Front: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC | 2.7 / 39 | - |
| - | 2.9 / 42 | |
| Rear: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC | ||
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h
640i Gran Coupe
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires | ![]() | |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC | 2.3 / 33 | 2.8 / 41 |
| 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC | ||
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC | ||
| Front: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC | 2.3 / 33 | - |
| - | 2.3 / 33 | |
| Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC | ||
| Front: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC | 2.3 / 33 | - |
| - | 2.5 / 36 | |
| Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC | ||
| Front: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC | 2.5 / 36 | - |
| - | 2.8 / 41 | |
| Rear: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC | ||
| Compact wheel: T 135/90 R 17 104 M | Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h | |
| 4.2 / 60 | ||
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires | ![]() |
245/45 R 18 100 V 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 M+S XL RSC
| Front: 245/45 R 1896 Y RSCRear:275/40 R 18 99 YRSC | 2.6 / 38- | -2.6 / 38 |
| Front: 245/40 R 1994 Y RSCRear:275/35 R 19 96 YRSC | 2.6 / 38- | -2.9 /42 |
| Front: 245/35 R 2095 Y XL RSCRear:275/30 R 20 97 YXL RSC | 2.8 / 41- | -3.1 / 45 |
| Compact wheel:T 135/90 R 17 104M | Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60 | |
Without high-speed tuning feature
| Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI | |
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires | ![]() |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC | 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC | |
| 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC | 2.5 / 36 2.9 /42 |
| Front: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC | 2.3 / 33 - 2.3 / 33 |
| Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC | |
| Front: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC | 2.3 / 33 - 2.5 / 36 |
| Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC | |
| Front: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC | 2.5 / 36 - 2.8 / 41 |
| Rear: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC | |
| Compact wheel: T 135/90 R 17 104 M | Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 |
With high-speed tuning feature
| Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI | |
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires | |
| 245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL A/S RSC | 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 |
| 245/45 R 18 100 VM+S XL RSC | |
| 245/40 R 19 98 VM+S XL A/S RSC | 2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46 |
| Front: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC | 2.6 / 38 - 2.6 / 38 |
| Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC | |
| Front: 245/40 R 19 94 Y RSC | 2.6 / 38 - 2.8 / 41 |
| Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC | |
| Front: 245/35 R 20 95 Y XL RSC | 2.8 / 41 - 3.1 / 45 |
| Rear: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC | |
| Compact wheel: T 135/90 R 17 104 M | Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 |
650i Gran Coupe
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifica-
tions in bar/PSI
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires |
245/45 R 18 100 V 2.5 / 36 2.8 / 41
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M 2.6 / 38 2.9 / 42
+S XL A/S RSC
Front: 245/45 R 18 2.5 / 36 -
96 Y RSC - 2.5 / 36
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 -
94 Y RSC - 2.5 / 36
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
Front: 245/35 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
95 Y XL RSC - 2.9/42
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

text_image
Diagram showing human silhouette icons and a car with directional arrows, likely illustrating vehicle or transportation concepts.245/45 R 18 100 V 2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45
M+S XL RSC
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
| Front: 245/45 R 18 | 2.8 / 41 | - |
| 96 Y RSC | - | 2.8 / 41 |
| Rear: | ||
| 275/40 R 18 99 Y | ||
| RSC |
| Front: 245/40 R 19 | 2.8 / 41 | - |
| 94 Y RSC | - | 2.8 / 41 |
Rear:
275/35 R 19 96 Y
RSC
| Front: 245/35 R 20 | 2.9 /42 | - |
| 95 Y XL RSC | - | 3.2 / 46 |
Rear:
275/30 R 20 97 Y XL
RSC
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires |
245/45 R 18 100 V 2.5 / 36 2.8 / 41
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 18 100 V
M+S XL RSC
245/40 R 19 98 V M 2.7 / 39 2.9 / 42
+S XL A/S RSC
| Front: 245/45 R 18 | 2.5 / 36 | - |
| 96 Y RSC | - | 2.5 / 36 |
Rear:
275/40 R 18 99 Y
RSC
| Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI | ||
| Front: 245/40 R 19 | 2.5 / 36 | - |
| 94 Y RSC | - | 2.5 / 36 |
| Rear: | ||
| 275/35 R 19 96 Y | ||
| RSC | ||
| Front: 245/35 R 20 | 2.7 / 39 | - |
| 95 Y XL RSC | - | 2.9 /42 |
| Rear: | ||
| 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL | ||
| RSC | ||
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
| Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires | ![]() |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC | 2.8 / 41 3.1 / 45 |
| 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC | |
| 245/40 R 19 98 V M +S XL A/S RSC | 3.0 / 44 3.3 / 48 |
| Front: 245/45 R 18 96 Y RSC | 2.8 / 41 - 2.8 / 41 |
| Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC |
| Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI | ||
| Front: 245/40 R 19 | 2.8 / 41 | - |
| 94 Y RSC | - | 2.8 / 41 |
| Rear: | ||
| 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC | ||
| Front: 245/35 R 20 | 2.9 /42 | - |
| 95 Y XL RSC | - | 3.1 / 45 |
| Rear: | ||
| 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC | ||
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
1013: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT ... 1013: the tire was manufactured in the 10th week 2013.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 201, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth

natural_image
3D illustration of a vehicle's suspension system with two black blocks on the side (no text or symbols)Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Notes
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush-
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle defects:
▶ Unusual vibrations during driving.
▶ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things.

In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, reduce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can be life-threatening for vehicle occupants and other traffic participants.

Repair of tire damage
For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be replaced. Otherwise, damage can occur as a result.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting

Information on mounting tires
Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.
Wheel and tire combination
Information on the correct wheel-tire combination and rim versions for your vehicle can be obtained from your service center.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model.
For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents.
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evaluate non-approved wheels and tires to determine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they are mounted.
Recommended tire brands

natural_image
Close-up of a weather tire with a star marking on its side (no text or symbols visible)For each tire size, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.
New tires
Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking-in period.
Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tires
Possibly substantial variations in the design and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.
Winter tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 °F/+7 °C.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and accidents can occur.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against switching wheels between the front and rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label

natural_image
Close-up of a car tire with a logo on the rim, showing tread pattern and side teeth (no text or symbols)RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 100.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 97.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle, classified as road-safe and recommended.
Consult your service center for more information.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:
225/55 R 17.
245/45 R 18.
245/40 R 19.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Snow chain detection
The concept
When using snow chains, settings should be made via the iDrive for the snow chains being applied.
The snow chain detection system supports you by automatically showing the detected state on the Control Display.
When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steering of the Integral Active Steering is deactivated automatically.
At speeds above the maximum permitted speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again automatically.
Activating the status
- "Settings"
- "Tire chains"
- "Tire chains installed"
Automatic detection
If functioning properly:
▶ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not activated ☐
After you drive a short distance, a Check Control message is shown and the state is activated automatically.
Confirm the automatic activation.
▶ Snow chains are not mounted. The setting is activated √
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check Control message is displayed. Deactivate the status manually.
If not functioning properly:
▶ Snow chains are mounted. The setting is not activated ☐
A Check Control message is not displayed.
The automatic detection system is malfunctioning. Activate the status manually.
Activating/deactivating rear axle steering
If the status indicating that snow chains are in use is activated, the rear axle steering is deactivated automatically.
At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again, even though snow chains are in use.
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip-
ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment

text_image
1 2 3 4 5 BMW BMW BMW 61 Vehicle identification number
2 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Washer fluid reservoir
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Oil filler neck.
6 Coolant reservoir, except 650i.
Hood
Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guidelines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Never reach into the engine compartment
Never reach into the intermediate spaces or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.
- Pull the lever.

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the side panel with a black clip and white paper clip, no visible text or symbols- Press the release handle and open the hood.

natural_image
Front view of a car's head with BMW logo and grille (no visible text or symbols)- Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

natural_image
3D rendered model of a curved, elongated object with internal features and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)
Danger of injury when the hood is open
There is a danger of injury from protruding parts when the hood is open.
Closing the hood

natural_image
Front view of a car with a grille and a downward arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Hood open when driving
If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over immediately and close it securely.

Danger of pinching
Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. When a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil consumption, for example, is clearly higher.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling.
Checking the oil level electronically
Status display
The concept
The oil level is monitored electronically during driving and shown on the Control Display.
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
Depending on the previous displays, the status display is displayed when the engine is running or after the vehicle has been driven for at least 30 minutes.
Displaying the oil level
- "Vehicle Info"
- "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display depending on the oil level. Pay attention to these messages.
If oil level is too low, immediately add 1 US quart/liter of oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine damage.
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.
During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines.
Requirements
▶ Automatic transmission: selector lever in transmission position N or P and accelerator not depressed.
▶ Vehicle is on a level road and the engine is running at operating temperature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level:
- "Vehicle Info"
-
"Vehicle status"
-
"Measure engine oil level"
- "Start measurement"
The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.
Duration: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Filler neck

natural_image
Close-up of a black circular knob with a white arrow pointing to it, surrounded by mechanical components (no text or symbols visible)When the indicator lights up in the instrument cluster, add 1 US quart/liter of engine oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of children and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.
Oil types for refilling
Hints

No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine damage.

Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.
Some types of oils in some cases are not available in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30.
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Additional information about the approved types of oils can be requested from the service center.
Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following specification can be added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior grade specification.
Oil change
An oil change should be carried out by your service center only.
BMW recommends

Coolant
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
General information

Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.

Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service center for suitable additives.
Coolant level
Checking
- Let the engine cool.
- Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex-
cess pressure to dissipate, and then open it.

natural_image
Mechanical component diagram showing a rotating knob with directional arrow (no text or symbols)- The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

text_image
max min- If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
- Turn the cap until there is an audible click. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the cap must point towards one another.
- Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.
Disposal

Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The maintenance system directs you to required maintenance measures and thereby supports you in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service determines the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile.
Details on the service requirements, refer to page 80, can be displayed on the Control Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle.
Therefore, hand your service specialist the remote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.
If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service booklet
Perform maintenance work at the service center, and record the work in the service booklet. The entries are proof of regular maintenance.
Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.
Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have regular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries are proof of regular maintenance.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis
Position

natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle emissions.
Emissions

The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Canadian model: warning light indicates the engine symbol.
The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis-firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.
Fuel cap

The indicator lamp lights up.
If the fuel cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that
fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then tightened, the display should go out in a short time.
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle showing a car trunk with a white arrow pointing to a panel, no visible text or symbols.The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored under the cargo floor cover in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
General information

Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.
Replacing the wiper blades
-
To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to page 67, the wiper arms.
-
Fold up the wipers.

natural_image
Diagram of a car interior showing two curved arrows pointing to the dashboard and side blades (no text or symbols present)-
Position the wiper blade in a horizontal position.
-
Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the windshield and seat area with a black cable or cable attachment (no text or symbols visible)-
Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place.
-
Fold down the wipers.
Lamp and bulb replacement
Hints
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.

Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Working on the lighting system
When working on the lighting system, you should always switch off the lights affected to prevent short circuits.
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.

Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls, display elements and other equipment.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.
Headlamp glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the external lamps in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this.
Headlamp setting
The headlamp adjustments can be affected by changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a change, have the headlamp setting checked and corrected by Service.
Xenon headlamps
Hints
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center.
Turning lamp on the Xenon headlamp
Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 210.
The illustration shows the left side of the engine compartment.
55-watt bulb, H3
- Turn the cap and remove it.

natural_image
Interior view of a car's dashboard and engine compartment showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)- Detach the wire bracket.

natural_image
Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical component or housing with internal blades and central shaft (no text or symbols)- Disconnect the cable at the plug-in connection and remove the bulb.
- Insert the new bulb. Ensure that the bulb has the correct orientation. Because of its shape, the bulb can only be inserted in one direction.
- Secure the bulb with the wire bracket.
- Connect the bulb.
- Mount the cap.
LED headlamps
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 210.
With LED headlamps, all front lamps and side indicators are designed with LED technology. If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations.
Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
At a glance

text_image
1 2 6 4 5 4 31 Turn signal/brake lamp
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Tail lamp
5 Outside brake lamp
6 Rear reflector
Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and license plate lamps
Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 210.
These lights feature LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.
Lamps in the trunk lid
Access to the lamps

natural_image
Top-down view of a car rear bumper with white arrows pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)If necessary, remove the fasteners using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit and fold away the cover.
Inside brake lamp
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 210.
24-watt bulb, HP24W
- Squeeze the bulb holder and pull it out.

natural_image
Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components with arrows indicating motion or force directions (no text or labels)-
Pull off the connector.
-
Replace the bulb.
-
Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the trunk lid in reverse order.
Reversing lamp
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 210.
16-watt bulb, W16W
- Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.

natural_image
Mechanical component diagram showing a valve mechanism inside a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)-
Pull out the bulb and replace it.
-
Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the trunk lid in reverse order.
Changing wheels
Hints
The vehicle equipment does not include a spare tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack

natural_image
Side-by-side comparison of a car's side profile showing front and rear views with upward arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.
Battery replacement

Use approved vehicle batteries only
Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available.
After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available and that any Check Control messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
Note

Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the following cases:
▶ When making frequent short-distance drives.
▶ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged periods, longer than a month.
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 218, in the engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▶ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory: store the positions again.
▶ Time: update.
Date: update.
▶ Radio station: saving new, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication.
▶ Navigation system: wait for the operability of the navigation.
Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recycling center.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Notes

Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the cargo area.
In the glove compartment

text_image
Diagram of car interior showing labeled components with arrows indicating parts 1 and 2Push the handle to the side, arrow 1, and open the lid, arrow 2.
In the cargo area

natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a mechanical component with an upward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)Remove the cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Hazard warning flashers

natural_image
Top-down view of a car air intake console with warning symbol and control panel (no text or labels)The button is located in the center console.
Intelligent Emergency Request
Requirements
The radio ready state is switched on.
The Assist system is functional.
The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated.
▶ A ConnectedDrive contract is available.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Hints
Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.
Initiating an Emergency Request

natural_image
Top-down view of a car dashboard with air vent and control buttons (no text or symbols visible)- Press the cover briefly to open it.
- Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.
The LED lights up: an Emergency Request was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been established.
The LED flashes when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been established.
When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances.
For this purpose, data that are used to determine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle
if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Response Center.
If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Response Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard for the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.
Warning triangle

natural_image
Top-down view of a vehicle rear panel showing engine compartment, buttons, and mounting points (no text or symbols visible)The warning triangle is located on the inside of the trunk lid.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First aid kit
Note
Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage

natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a handle and seat with a downward arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)The first aid kit is located in a compartment on the right side in the cargo area. Raise the cover to remove it.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain assistance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be established directly.
Jump-starting
Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.

Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.
Preparation
- Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This information can be found on the battery.
- Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
- Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehicles
Make sure that there is no contact between the bodywork of the two vehicles; otherwise, there is the danger of short circuits.
Starting aid terminals

Connecting order
Connect the jumper cables in the correct order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.

natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted bolt and arrow pointing to a small component (no visible text or symbols)The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive terminal.

natural_image
Mechanical component diagram showing a bolt and lever mechanism (no text or symbols)The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
- Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid terminal.
- Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
- Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
- Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.
- Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
-
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.
-
Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making an-
other attempt in order to allow the dis- charged battery to recharge.
- Let both engines run for several minutes.
- Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Transportieren Transporting your vehicle
Note
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a loading platform only; otherwise, damage may occur.
Tow truck

natural_image
Illustration of three cars with a flatbed truck and two unloading trucks, no text or symbols present.
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only.
Towing other vehicles
General information

Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle response.

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following:
▶ Maneuvering capability is limited during cornering.
The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctly
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fitting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.
Tow fitting

natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle showing a car trunk and adjacent vehicle door, with a white arrow pointing to a section (no text or symbols visible)The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is contained in the onboard vehicle tool kit under the cargo floor cover.

Tow fitting, information on use
▶ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▶ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.
▶ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.
Screw thread

natural_image
Front view of a modern car with visible grille and side panel (no text or symbols)
natural_image
Close-up of a white car's side panel showing a small black square and a glossy surface (no text or symbols visible)Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.
Tow-starting
Note: Automatic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties remedied.
Care
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Car washes
Hints

Steam jets or high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140^ F/60 ^ C.
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is maintained. Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage.
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter.
Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.
Automatic car washes
Hints
Note the following:
▶ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
▶ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▶ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.
▶ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 66, to avoid unintentional wiper activation.
In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instructions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 41.

Guide rails in car washes
Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps:
- Drive into the car wash.
- Engage transmission position N.
- Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check-Control message is displayed.

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; otherwise, the transmission position P is engaged and damages can result.
To start the engine:
- Depress the brake pedal.
- Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without stepping on the brake turns the ignition off.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.
Transmission position
Transmission position P is engaged automatically:
▶ When the ignition is switched off.
▶ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caustic cleansers.
Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.
- Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Car care products
BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles.
Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car care to these influences.
Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the service center.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro® fasteners
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 °F/60 °C. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers.
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood components only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.
Plastic components
These include:
▶ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Headliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▶ Instrument cluster cover.
▶ Matte black spray-coated components.
▶ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
Do not soak the headliner.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaning
Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats

No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.
Floor mats can be removed from the passenger compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber cloth.

Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household
cleansers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfaces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.
Long-term vehicle storage
Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.

text_image
T M N Z M P D R S Y U H G J K M U F E D C B R Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 909 877 - VI/13Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need.
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip-
ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.
Dimensions
Width, height

text_image
1 2 31 Vehicle height: 54.8 inches/1,392 mm
2 Vehicle width without mirrors: 74.6 inches/1,894 mm
3 Vehicle width with mirrors: 81.9 inches/2,081 mm
Length, wheel base

natural_image
Side profile line drawing of a sedan car with dimension annotations (no text or symbols on the car itself)1 Wheelbase: 116.9 inches/2,968 mm 2 Length: 197.2 inches/5,009 mm
Smallest turning circle
Dia.: 39.2 ft/11.95 m
Weights
640i Gran Coupe
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,270/2,390
Load lbs/kg 905/411
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,490/1,129
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,855/1,295
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2-44.6/460-1,265
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,375/2,438
Load lbs/kg 905/411
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,655/1,204
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,880/1,306
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2-44.6/460-1,265
650i Gran Coupe
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,455/2,474
Load lbs/kg 905/411
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,665/1,209
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2-44.6/460-1,265
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,620/2,549
Load lbs/kg 905/411
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,920/1,324
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.2-44.6/460-1,265
Capacities
| Notes | ||
| Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer to page 190 | ||
| Windshield and headlamp washer system | US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5.0 | |
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake System 117
ACC, Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go 125
Activated-charcoal filter 155
Active Blind Spot Detection 113
Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, ACC 125
Active Protection 114
Active roll stabilization, see Dynamic Drive 120
Active seat, front 47
Active seat ventilation, front 48
Active Steering, integral 120
Adaptive brake assistant 117
Adaptive brake lights, refer to Brake force display 114
Adaptive drive 120
Adaptive light control 88
Additives, oil 206
Adjusting, steering wheel 53
Adjustments, seats/head re- straints 45
After washing vehicle 222
Airbags 92
Airbags, indicator/warning light 93
Air circulation, refer to Recirculated-air mode 154
Air distribution, manual 153
Air drying, refer to Cooling function 154
Air flow, automatic climate control 153
Air pressure, tires 191
Air vents, refer to Ventilation 157
Alarm system 40
Alarm, unintentional 41
All around the center console 14
All around the interior rear-view mirror 15
All around the steering wheel 12
All-season tires, refer to Winter tires 200
All-wheel-drive 119
Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 161
Alternative oil types 206
Ambient light 90
Antifreeze, washer fluid 67
Antilock Brake System, ABS 117
Anti-slip control, refer to DSC 117
Approved engine oils 206
Armrest, refer to Front center armrest 168
Armrest, refer to Rear center armrest 169
Arrival time 84
Ashtray 162
Ashtray, rear 163
Assistance, Roadside Assistance 217
Assistance when driving off 117
Attentiveness assistant 115
AUTO H button, refer to Automatic Hold 63
AUTO intensity 153
Automatic car wash 221
Automatic Cruise Control with Stop & Go 125
Automatic Curb Monitor 52
Automatic deactivation, front passenger airbags 94
Automatic headlamp control 88
Automatic Hold 63
Automatic locking 39
Automatic recirculated-air control 154
Automatic Soft Closing, doors 36
Automatic transmission with Steptronic 68
AUTO program, automatic climate control 153
AUTO program, intensity 153
Auto Start/Stop function 60
Average fuel consumption 84
Average speed 84
Axle loads, weights 229
B
Backrest curvature, refer to Lumbar support 46
Backrest, seats 45
Backrest, width 46
Backup camera 139
Band-aids, refer to First aid kit 217
Bar for tow-starting/towing 219
Battery replacement, remote control for parked-car heating/ventilation 159
Battery replacement, vehicle battery 214
Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 30
Battery, vehicle 214
Belts, safety belts 48
Beverage holder, cu-
pholder 169
Blinds, sun protection 42
BMW Assist, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys-
tem 208
Bonus range, ECO PRO 181
Bottle holder, refer to Cupholder 169
Brake assistant 117
Brake assistant, adaptive 117
Brake discs, breaking in 174
Brake force display 114
Brake lamps, brake force display 114
Brake lamps, bulb replacement 212
Brake lights, adaptive 114
Brake pads, breaking in 174
Braking, hints 175
Breakdown assistance 216, 217
Breaking in 174
Brightness of Control Dis-
play 86
Bulb replacement, front 210
Bulb replacement, rear 212
Button, RES 128
Button, Start/Stop 58
Bypassing, refer to Jump-starting 217
C
California Proposition 65 Warning 7
Calling up mirror adjustment 39
Calling up seat adjustment 39
Calling up steering wheel adjustment 39
Camera, backup camera 139
Camera, care 224
Camera, Side View 144
Camera, Top View 142
Can holder, refer to Cu-
pholder 169
Car battery 214
Car care products 222
Care, displays 224
Care, vehicle 222
Cargo 177
Cargo area, enlarging 164
Cargo area lid 36
Cargo area, storage compartments 170
Cargo, securing 178
Cargo straps, securing cargo 178
Car key, refer to Remote control 30
Carpet, care 224
Car wash 221
Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 174
CBS Condition Based Service 208
CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
Center console 14
Center-Lock, see button for central locking 33
Central locking system 33
Central screen, refer to Control Display 16
Changes, technical, refer to Safety 7
Changing parts 210
Changing wheels 213
Changing wheels/tires 199
Check Control 76
Checking the oil level electronically 205
Children, seating position 54
Children, transporting safely 54
Child restraint fixing sys-
tem 54
Child restraint fixing system LATCH 55
Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 54
Child safety locks 57
Child seat, mounting 54
Child seats 54
Chrome parts, care 223
Cigarette lighter 162
Cleaning, displays 224
Climate control 152
Climate control laminated tinted safety glass 175
Climate control wind-
shield 175
Clock 79
Closing/opening from in-side 36
Closing/opening via door lock 35
Closing/opening with remote control 34
Clothes hooks 169
Coasting 183
Coasting with engine decoupled, coasting 183
Coasting with idling engine 183
Collision warning with braking function 101
Collision warning with City Braking function 104
Combination switch, refer to Turn signals 65
Combination switch, refer to Wiper system 65
COMFORT+ program, Driving Dynamics Control 123
Comfort Access 37
COMFORT program, Driving Dynamics Control 123
Computer 83
Condensation on windows 153
Condensation under the vehicle 176
Condition Based Service CBS 208
Configure driving mode 123
Confirmation signal 39
Congestion Assistant 131
ConnectedDrive, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
ConnectedDrive Services
Control Display 16
Control Display, settings 85
Controller 16
Control systems, driving stability 117
Convenient opening 34
Coolant 207
Coolant temperature 79
Cooling function 154
Cooling, maximum 154
Cooling system 207
Corrosion on brake discs 176
Cruise control 134
Cruise control, active with Stop & Go 125
Cruising range 79
Cupholder 169
Current fuel consumption 80
D
Damage, tires 199
Damping Control, dynamic 120
Data, technical 228
Date 79
Daytime running lights 88
Defrosting, refer to Windows, defrosting 153
Departure time, parked-car heating 158
Departure time, parked-car ventilation 158
Destination distance 84
Digital clock 79
Dimensions 228
Dimmable exterior mirrors 52
Dimmable interior rearview mirror 53
Direction indicator, refer to Turn signals 65
Display in windshield 149
Display lighting, refer to In-strument lighting 90
Displays 72, 73
Displays, cleaning 224
Disposal, coolant 207
Disposal, vehicle battery 214
Distance control, refer to PDC 137
Distance information 150
Distance to destination 84
Divided screen view, split screen 20
Door lock, refer to Remote control 30
Doors, Automatic Soft Closing 36
Downhill control 119
Drive-off assistant 117
Drive-off assistant, refer to DSC 117
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 100
Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 100
Driving Dynamics Control 121
Driving instructions, breaking in 174
Driving mode 121
Driving notes, general 174
Driving stability control systems 117
Driving tips 174
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 117
DTC driving dynamics 118
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 118
Dynamic Damping Control 120
Dynamic Drive 120
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 117
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 118
E
ECO PRO 180
ECO PRO, bonus range 181
ECO PRO display 180
ECO PRO displays 75
ECO PRO driving mode 180
ECO PRO mode 180
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction 182
EfficientDynamics 182
Electronic displays, instrument cluster 73
Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to DSC 117
Emergency detection, remote control 31
Emergency release, door lock 36
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 188
Emergency release, parking brake 64
Emergency Request 216
Emergency service, refer to Roadside Assistance 217
Emergency start function, engine start 31
Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 37
Energy Control 80
Energy recovery 80
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 60
Engine, automatic switch-off 60
Engine compartment 203
Engine compartment, working in 203
Engine coolant 207
Engine idling when driving, coasting 183
Engine oil 205
Engine oil, adding 206
Engine oil additives 206
Engine oil change 206
Engine oil filler neck 206
Engine oil temperature 78
Engine oil types, alternative 206
Engine oil types, approved 206
Engine start during malfunction 31
Engine start, jump-starting 217
Engine start, refer to Starting the engine 59
Engine stop 59
Engine temperature 78
Entering/exiting vehicle, assistance, steering wheel 53
Entering a car wash 221
Equipment, interior 160
ESP Electronic Stability Program, refer to DSC 117
Exchanging wheels/tires 199
Exhaust system 174
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 52
Exterior mirrors 51
External start 217
External temperature display 79
External temperature warning 79
Eyes for securing cargo 178
F
Failure message, refer to Check Control 76
False alarm, refer to Unintentional alarm 41
Fan, refer to Air flow 153
Fault displays, refer to Check Control 76
Filler neck for engine oil 206
Fine wood, care 223
First aid kit 217
Fitting for towing, refer to Tow fitting 220
Flat tire, changing wheels 213
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 98
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 95
Flat tire, warning lamp 96, 99
Flooding 175
Floor carpet, care 224
Floor mats, care 224
Fold down the rear seat back-rest, see Though-loading system 164
Fold-out position, windshield wipers 67
Foot brake 175
For the headliner, refer to All around the interior rearview mirror 15
Front airbags 92
Front center armrest 168
Front fog lamps 90
Front lamps 210
Front passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 94
Front passenger airbags, indicator lamp 94
Front seats 45
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 98
Fuel 190
Fuel cap 188
Fuel consumption, current 80
Fuel consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 84
Fuel filler flap 188
Fuel gauge 78
Fuel quality 190
Fuel recommendation 190
Fuel, tank capacity 230
Fuse 214
G
Garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 160
Gasoline 190
Gasoline quality 190
Gear change, automatic transmission 68
Gear shift indicator 81
General driving notes 174
Glass sunroof, powered with tilt function 43
Glove compartment 167
Gross vehicle weight, approved 229
Gross weight, permissible for trailer towing 229
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking brake 62
Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 161
Hazard warning flashers 216
HDC Hill Descent Control 119
Head airbags 92
Headlamp control, automatic 88
Headlamp courtesy delay fea- ture 87
Headlamp courtesy delay feature via remote control 34
Headlamp flasher 65
Headlamp glass 211
Headlamps 210
Headlamps, care 222
Headlamp washer system 65
Head restraints 45
Head restraints, front 49
Head-Up Display 149
Head-up Display, care 224
Heating, refer to Parked-car heating 157
Heavy cargo, stowing 178
Height, seats 45
Height, vehicle 228
High-beam Assistant 89
High beams 65
High beams/low beams, refer to High-beam Assistant 89
Hill Descent Control HDC 119
Hills 176
Hill start assistant, refer to Drive-off assistant 117
Hints 6
Holder for beverages 169
Homepage 6
Hood 203
Horn 12
Hotel function, trunk lid 37
Hot exhaust system 174
HUD Head-Up Display 149
Hydroplaning 175

Ice warning, refer to External temperature warning 79
Icy roads, refer to External temperature warning 79
Identification marks, tires 197
Identification number, refer to Important features in the engine compartment 203
iDrive 16
Ignition key, refer to Remote control 30
Ignition off 58
Ignition on 58
Indication of a flat tire 96, 99
Indicator and warning lamps 76
Individual air distribution 153
Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 31
Inflation pressure, tires 191
Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 98
Info display, refer to Computer 83
Initialization, Integral Active Steering 121
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 96
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 99
Instrument cluster 72
Instrument cluster, electronic displays 73
Instrument display, multifunctional 73
Instrument lighting 90
Integral Active Steering 120
Integrated key 30
Integrated universal remote control 160
Intelligent Emergency Request 216
Intelligent Safety 100
Intensity, AUTO program 153
Interior equipment 160
Interior lamps 90
Interior lamps via remote control 34
Interior motion sensor 41
Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature 53
Internet page 6
Interval display, service requirements 80

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 213
Joystick, automatic transmission 68
Jump-starting 217

Key/remote control 30
Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Access 37
Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 31
Kickdown, automatic trans- mission 68
Knee airbag 92

Lamp replacement, front 210
Lamp replacement, rear 212
Lamps 87
Lamps and bulbs 210
Lane departure warning 111
Lane margin, warning 111
Language on Control Dis- play 86
Lashing eyes, securing cargo 178
LATCH child restraint fixing system 55
Leather, care 222
LED headlamps, Bulb replacement 212
LED light 212
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 211
Length, vehicle 229
Letters and numbers, entering 21
License plate lamp, bulb replacement 212
Light alloy wheels, care 223
Light control 88
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 211
Lighting 87
Lighting, speaker 91
Lighting via remote control 34
Light switch 87
Load 177
Loading 177
Lock, door 35
Locking/unlocking from inside 36
Locking/unlocking via door lock 35
Locking/unlocking with remote control 34
Locking, automatic 39
Locking, central 33
Locking, settings 39
Locking via trunk lid 37
Lock, power window 42
Locks, doors, and windows 57
Low beams 87
Low beams, automatic, refer to High-beam Assistant 89
Lower back support 46
Lumbar support 46
Maintenance 208
Maintenance requirements 208
Maintenance, service requirements 80
Maintenance system, BMW 208
Malfunction displays, refer to Check Control 76
Manual air distribution 153
Manual air flow 153
Manual brake, refer to Parking brake 62
Manual mode, transmission 69
M
Manual operation, backup camera 140
Manual operation, door lock 36
Manual operation, exterior mirrors 52
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 188
Manual operation, Park Distance Control PDC 137
Manual operation, parking brake 64
Manual operation, Side View 144
Manual operation, Top View 142
Marking on approved tires 200
Marking, run-flat tires 201
Massage seat, front 47
Master key, refer to Remote control 30
Maximum cooling 154
Maximum speed, display 81
Maximum speed, winter tires 200
Measure, units of 86
Medical kit 217
Memory for seat, mirrors, steering wheel 51
Menu, EfficientDynamics 182
Menu in instrument cluster 83
Menus, operating, iDrive 16
Menus, refer to iDrive operating concept 17
Messages, refer to Check Control 76
Microfilter 155
Minimum tread, tires 199
Mirror 51
Mirror memory 51
Mobile communication devices in the vehicle 175
Modifications, technical, refer to Safety 7
Moisture in headlamp 211
Monitor, refer to Control Display 16
Mounting of child restraint fixing systems 54
Multifunctional instrument display 73
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 12
N
Navigation, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 49
Neutral cleaner, see wheel cleaner 223
New wheels and tires 199
Night Vision with pedestrian detection 108
No Passing Information 81
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 219
0
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 209
OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 209
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 141
Octane rating, refer to Gasoline quality 190
Odometer 79
Office, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
Oil 205
Oil, adding 206
Oil additives 206
Oil change 206
Oil change interval, service requirements 80
Oil filler neck 206
Oil types, alternative 206
Oil types, approved 206
Old batteries, disposal 214
Onboard monitor, refer to Control Display 16
Onboard vehicle tool kit 210
Opening and closing 30
Opening and closing, from inside 36
Opening and closing via door lock 35
Opening and closing, with remote control 34
Operating concept, iDrive 16
Optional equipment, standard equipment 6
Outside air, refer to Automatic recirculated-air control 154
Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature 79
Overtaking prohibitions 81
P
Paint, vehicle 222
Parallel parking assistant 145
Park Distance Control
PDC 137
Parked-car heating 158
Parked-car ventilation 158
Parked vehicle, condensation 176
Parking aid, refer to PDC 137
Parking assistant 145
Parking brake 62
Parking lamps 87
Parking with Auto Hold 63
Passenger side mirror, tilting downward 52
Pathway lines, rearview camera 140
PDC Park Distance Control 137
Pedestrian detection, refer to Night Vision 108
Pedestrian warning with city braking function 106
People detection, refer to Night Vision 108
Permissible axle load 229
Personal Profile 31
Pinch protection system, glass sunroof 44
Pinch protection system, windows 42
Plastic, care 223
Power failure 214
Power sunroof, glass 43
Power windows 41
Pressure, tire air pressure 191
Pressure warning FTM, tires 98
Profile, refer to Personal Profile 31
Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 20
Protective function, glass sunroof 44
Protective function, windows 42
Push-and-turn switch, refer to Controller 16
Q
Queuing Assistant, see Congestion Assistant 131
R
Radiator fluid 207
Radio-operated key, refer to Remote control 30
Radio ready state 59
Radio, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
Rain sensor 66
Rear automatic climate control 155
Rear axle steering 120
Rear center armrest 169
Rear lamps 212
Rearview mirror 51
Rear window defroster 154
Recirculated-air mode 154
Recommended tire brands 200
Refueling 188
Remaining range 79
Remote control/key 30
Remote control, malfunction 35
Remote control, parked-car heating/ventilation 159
Remote control, universal 160
Replacement fuse 214
Replacing bulbs, see Lamp replacement 210
Replacing parts 210
Replacing wheels/tires 199
Reporting safety defects 9
RES button 128
Reserve warning, refer to Range 79
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 96
Residual heat, automatic climate control 154
Retaining straps, securing cargo 178
Retreaded tires 200
Reversing lamp, bulb replacement 213
Roadside parking lamps 88
Roller sunblinds 42
Roll stabilization, refer to Adaptive Drive 120
Roll stabilization, see Dynamic Drive 120
RON gasoline quality 190
Rope for tow-starting/towing 219
RSC Run Flat System Component, refer to Run-flat tires 201
Rubber components, care 223
Run-flat tires 201
S
Safe braking 175
Safety 7
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat 49
Safety belts 48
Safety belts, care 223
Safety Package, refer to Active Protection 114
Safety switch, windows 42
Safety systems, airbags 92
Saving fuel 179
Screen, refer to Control Dis- play 16
Screwdriver 210
Screw thread for tow fitting 220
Seat belts, refer to Safety belts 48
Seat heating, front 47
Seat heating, rear 48
Seating position for children 54
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory 51
Seats 45
Seat ventilation, front 48
Selection list in instrument cluster 83
Selector lever, automatic transmission 68
Sensors, care 224
Service and warranty 7
Service requirements, Condition Based Service CBS 208
Service requirements, display 80
Service, Roadside Assistance 217
Services, ConnectedDrive
Settings, locking/unlocking 39
Settings on Control Dis- play 85
Settings, storing for seat, mirrors, steering wheel 51
Shifting, automatic transmission 68
Shift Lights 70
Shift paddles on steering wheel 70
Shoulder support 47
Side airbags 92
Side View 143
Signaling, horn 12
Signals when unlocking 39
Sitting safely 45
Size 228
Ski bag 165
Smallest turning circle 229
Smoker's package 162
Snow chains 201
Socket 163
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 209
SOS button 216
Spare fuse 214
Speaker lighting 91
Specified engine oil types 206
Speed, average 84
Speed limit detection, on-board computer 84
Speed limiter, display 81
Speed Limit Information 81
Speed limit in the computer 84
Split screen 20
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Driving Control 122
Sport automatic transmission 70
SPORT program, driving dynamics 123
Sport program, transmission 69
Stability control systems 117
Start/stop, automatic function 60
Start/Stop button 58
Start function during malfunction 31
Starting the engine 59
Status display, tires 95
Status information, iDrive 19
Status of Owner's Manual 6
Steering, Integral Active Steering 120
Steering wheel, adjusting 53
Steering wheel heating 53
Steering wheel memory 51
Steptronic, automatic transmission 68
Stopping the engine 59
Storage compartments 167
Storage compartments, locations 167
Storage, tires 201
Storing the vehicle 224
Summer tires, tread 199
Supplementary text mes- sage 77
Surround View 139
Suspension settings 121
Switch for Dynamic Driving Control 121
Switch, refer to Cockpit 12
Symbols 6
SYNC program, automatic climate control 154
T
Tachometer 78
Tail and brake lamps 212
Tailgate 36
Tailgate via remote control 34
Tail lamps 212
Tail lamps, bulb replacement 212
Technical changes, refer to Safety 7
Technical data 228
Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
Temperature, automatic climate control 153
Temperature display, external temperature 79
Temperature, engine oil 78
Tempomat, refer to Active Cruise Control 125
Terminal, starting aid 218
Text message, supplementary 77
Theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 40
Theft protection, refer to Central locking system 33
Thermal camera, refer to Night Vision 108
Thigh support 46
Through-loading system 164
Tilt alarm sensor 41
Tilt glass roof 43
Tilt, seats 45
Time of arrival 84
Tire damage 199
Tire identification marks 197
Tire inflation pressure 191
Tire inflation pressure monitor, refer to FTM 98
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 95
Tires, changing 199
Tires, everything on wheels and tires 191
Tires, run-flat tires 201
Tire tread 199
Tone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication
Tools 210
Top View 141
Total vehicle weight 229
Tow fitting 220
Towing 219
Tow-starting 219
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 95
Traction control 118
TRACTION program, Dynamic Driving Control 122
Transmission, automatic 68
Transporting children safely 54
Tread, tires 199
Trip computer 85
Triple turn signal activation 65
Trip odometer 79
Trunk lid 36
Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 37
Trunk lid, hotel function 37
Trunk lid via remote control 34
Turning circle 229
Turning circle lines, rearview camera 140
Turn signals, operation 65
Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 212
U
Unintentional alarm 41
Units of measure 86
Universal remote control 160
Unlock button, automatic transmission 69
Unlocking/locking from inside 36
Unlocking/locking via door lock 35
Unlocking/locking with remote control 34
Unlocking, settings 39
Updates made after the editorial deadline 7
Upholstery care 223
USB interface 167
V
Variable steering, Integral Active Steering 120
Vehicle battery 214
Vehicle battery, replacing 214
Vehicle, breaking in 174
Vehicle care 222
Vehicle equipment 6
Vehicle identification number, refer to Identification number in the engine compartment 203
Vehicle jack 213
Vehicle paint 222
Vehicle storage 224
Vehicle wash 221
Ventilation 157
Vertical Dynamic Control, refer to Dynamic Damping Control 120
Voice activation system 22
W
Warning indicators 76
Warning lamps 76
Warning messages, refer to Check Control 76
Warning triangle 217
Washer fluid 67
Washer fluid reservoir, capacity 230
Washer nozzles, wind- shield 67
Washer system 65
Washing, vehicle 221
Water on roads 175
Weights 229
Welcome lamps 87
Wheel base, vehicle 229
Wheel cleaner 223
Wheels, changing 199
Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 191
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 98
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 95
Width, vehicle 228
Window defroster, rear 154
Windows, powered 41
Windshield, climate control 175
Windshield washer fluid 67
Windshield washer nozzles 67
Windshield washer sys- tem 65
Windshield wiper 65
Windshield wipers, fold-out position 67
Winter storage, care 224
Winter tires, suitable tires 200
Winter tires, tread 199
Wiper blades, replacing 210
Wiper fluid 67
Wiper system 65
Wood, care 223
Word match concept, navigation 21
Wrench 210
X
xDrive 119
Xenon headlamps, bulb replacement 211
More about BMW
bmwusa.com

The Ultimate Driving Machine






















